Actions

Work Header

The Quiet Pirate: Aiko’s Journey

Summary:

Aiko never imagined that meeting a reckless pirate would change her life.
But some encounters are not coincidences, they are fate in disguise.

Notes:

English is not my first language and this is my first story.
I hope you like it and you can even tell me if i can do something better.
:)

Fanart: https: https://pin.it/6Pve92smq

Chapter 1: The Girl Who Chose the Sea

Summary:

“I-I’m just a girl with a sword… don’t expect too much.”

Chapter Text

Shells Town was as ordinary as ever. The Marine base cast its imposing shadow over the cobblestone streets, a reminder to the citizens of the island who was truly in charge. Small shops lined the main road, their colorful awnings swaying gently in the salty breeze. Seagulls squawked overhead, circling lazily as fishmongers hollered their prices.

Aiko made her way through the market square, her white dress trailing slightly in the dust as she weaved between the bustling townsfolk. Her long pink hair, tied loosely with a ribbon, caught the afternoon sunlight, earning a few glances from passersby. She paid them little attention, her mind preoccupied. Her sword, resting in its well-worn scabbard, lightly tapped her side with each step.

“Good afternoon, Aiko!” called a familiar voice. It was Rika, the baker’s spirited daughter, balancing a tray of steaming bread fresh from the oven.
Aiko smiled warmly and approached the little girl. “Good afternoon, Rika. That smells delicious.”
“Want one?” Rika asked eagerly, holding out a small loaf.
“Oh, I couldn’t,” Aiko said, shaking her head. “You should save those for your customers.”
“But you’re my friend!” Rika insisted, her face lighting up. “And Mama says friends should share.”
Aiko hesitated before accepting the bread with a soft chuckle. “Thank you. I’ll be sure to tell your mother how kind you are.”
“You’re coming for dinner later, right?” Rika asked, her voice filled with excitement. “Mama said I can invite whoever I want, and I picked you!”
“I’ll try,” Aiko replied, tucking the bread into her satchel. She didn’t have the heart to tell Rika that Helmeppo had dragged her into another one of his errands.

Speaking of Helmeppo, his voice rang out from further down the street, loud and unmistakably pompous. “Aiko! There you are! I’ve been looking all over for you!”
Aiko sighed as Helmeppo approached, his Marine uniform as immaculate as ever. He was the picture of someone who had never known a hard day’s work—his blond hair perfectly styled, his posture stiff with exaggerated confidence. But to Aiko, he was more than the spoiled son of Captain Morgan. He was her oldest friend, a rare constant in her quiet life.
“You’re late,” Helmeppo said, crossing his arms. “Father will kill me if we don’t get those files sorted out by the end of the day.”
“I’m sorry, Helmeppo,” Aiko said softly. “I stopped to talk to Rika.”
“Rika? You mean the bread girl?” Helmeppo wrinkled his nose but quickly sighed, softening his tone. “Well, at least you’re making time for your little friends.”
Aiko raised an eyebrow. “And what does that mean?”
“Nothing! Nothing at all!” Helmeppo said quickly, raising his hands in mock surrender. “Let’s just go. I don’t want to be anywhere near Father when he’s in one of his moods.”

 

The Marine base loomed ahead, its gates tall and intimidating. Inside the yard, Aiko caught sight of the infamous Roronoa Zoro tied to a post in the center. His arms were stretched out, his green hair falling over his face as he stood unyielding under the blazing sun. The tension in the air was palpable; even the Marines patrolling nearby seemed wary of getting too close to the pirate hunter.

Aiko’s steps slowed as she neared the gates. She had seen Zoro from a distance before, but this was the first time she was so close. The stories about him were chilling—an unbeatable swordsman, ruthless and unrelenting. But now, seeing him tied and weakened, she felt a pang of something unexpected. Pity? No, that wasn’t quite it. It was more like… curiosity.
“What are you staring at?” Helmeppo asked, nudging her.
“Zoro,” Aiko murmured, her voice barely audible.
Helmeppo rolled his eyes. “Don’t waste your sympathy on him, Aiko. He’s a criminal.”
“Then why hasn’t he been executed yet?” she asked, her gaze never leaving Zoro.
Helmeppo smirked. “Father likes to make examples of people. Zoro will stay there until everyone knows what happens to those who defy the Marines.”
“That’s cruel,” Aiko said quietly, her grip tightening on the hilt of her sword.
“It’s justice,” Helmeppo replied, though his voice lacked conviction. He sighed, running a hand through his hair. “Come on, let’s just get this over with.”
As they passed through the gates, Aiko couldn’t shake the feeling that today was different—that something was about to change. She glanced back at Zoro one last time, and for a brief moment, their eyes met. His piercing gaze held no malice, only a quiet strength that sent a shiver down her spine.

 

The afternoon sun blazed down on the Marine base courtyard as Aiko followed Helmeppo toward the administrative office. The tense air around the yard was thick with whispers about Roronoa Zoro—the pirate hunter bound to the post at its center. Though Aiko tried to keep her focus on Helmeppo’s constant chatter, her eyes drifted back to Zoro’s imposing figure.

Despite his precarious situation, Zoro didn’t appear defeated. He stood tall and unwavering, his green hair damp with sweat, but his piercing gaze refused to falter. It was almost as though he welcomed the challenge. Aiko couldn’t help but feel drawn to his quiet strength.
“That’s Zoro for you,” Helmeppo muttered, as if reading her thoughts. “Too stubborn to beg for his life, even if it would make things easier for him.”
“Is that why your father has kept him alive?” Aiko asked softly. “To make an example of him?”
“Of course!” Helmeppo replied smugly. “Father believes in public displays of power. Keeping Zoro alive shows everyone who’s in control.” He glanced at Aiko, his expression softening. “But you don’t need to worry about that, Aiko. You’re safe with me.”

Aiko forced a small smile but said nothing. Helmeppo meant well, in his own way, but his blind loyalty to his father often left her conflicted. She wanted to believe in him—to believe that he could one day rise above Captain Morgan’s tyrannical rule—but moments like these made her doubt.
Their conversation was interrupted by a commotion at the gates. Aiko turned to see a boy with a straw hat marching confidently into the Marine yard, his grin as bright as the sun overhead. Following close behind was a nervous-looking boy with pink hair, clutching his sailor hat tightly.
“Luffy!” the pink-haired boy hissed, his voice filled with panic. “You can’t just walk in here! This is a Marine base!”
“Relax, Coby,” the boy replied, waving him off. “I just want to meet Zoro.”
“What in the world?” Helmeppo muttered, narrowing his eyes at the newcomers. “Who are these clowns?”
The boy in the straw hat stopped in the middle of the yard, his gaze locking onto Zoro. His grin widened as he pointed dramatically. “You’re Roronoa Zoro, right?”
Zoro’s eyes flicked toward him, his expression unreadable. “Who’s asking?”
“I’m Monkey D. Luffy,” the boy declared, his voice ringing across the yard. “And I’m going to be King of the Pirates!”

The courtyard of the Marine base crackled with tension as Captain Morgan loomed over the small group. His massive axe-hand gleamed in the sunlight, a chilling reminder of his absolute authority over Shells Town. His cold eyes shifted between Luffy, Aiko, and the trembling little Rika, who clutched her now-forgotten basket of rice balls.
Monkey D. Luffy stood his ground, his carefree demeanor replaced by steely determination. Despite Morgan’s towering presence, Luffy’s expression remained unshaken.
“I’m warning you,” Morgan growled, his voice carrying an edge of menace. “Step aside, boy, or I’ll make an example of you too.”
Luffy tilted his head, his signature grin slowly returning. “I don’t think so.”
Morgan’s eyes narrowed as he raised his axe-hand, ready to strike. Aiko’s breath caught in her throat, her hand instinctively moving to the hilt of her sword. She had never dared to defy Morgan openly, but this boy—this pirate—was forcing her to confront a choice she had long avoided.

“Father, wait!” Helmeppo’s voice cut through the heavy silence, filled with a mix of fear and desperation. He stepped forward, placing himself between Morgan and Luffy. “There’s no need to escalate this. He’s just a foolish boy. Let me handle it.”
Morgan glared at his son, his expression darkening. “Helmeppo, you’ve already embarrassed me enough for one day. Step aside.”
Helmeppo hesitated, his usual bravado crumbling under the weight of his father’s disdain. He glanced at Aiko, his eyes pleading for guidance, but she looked away, unable to meet his gaze. For the first time, he realized that the unwavering support he had always relied on was not so certain anymore.
Meanwhile, Zoro watched the scene unfold with sharp, calculating eyes. Though he was bound to the post, his commanding presence was undeniable. He let out a low chuckle, breaking the tense silence.

“This is pathetic,” Zoro said, his voice laced with disdain. “A bunch of so-called Marines picking on a little girl and a couple of kids. You call this justice?”
Morgan’s head snapped toward Zoro, his fury boiling over. “Silence, criminal! You’re in no position to judge my methods.”
“Maybe not,” Zoro replied, his tone calm but defiant. “But I know cowards when I see them.”
Luffy turned to Zoro, his grin widening. “I like you even more now. You’d make a great crewmate.”
Aiko couldn’t believe what she was hearing. How could Luffy be so casual in the face of such danger? And yet, his confidence was contagious. For the first time in her life, she found herself questioning everything she had been taught about pirates and Marines.

Morgan, seething with rage, raised his axe-hand once more. “Enough of this nonsense. You’ll all learn to respect my authority.”
Before he could strike, Aiko stepped forward, her voice trembling but clear. “Captain Morgan, please! This isn’t justice. You’re only using your power to feed your ego.”
The courtyard fell silent. Aiko’s words hung in the air like a challenge, and every pair of eyes turned toward her. Even Morgan seemed momentarily stunned by her boldness.
Helmeppo’s jaw dropped. “Aiko... what are you doing?”
“I’m doing what’s right,” she said, her grip tightening on the hilt of her sword. “I’ve stayed silent for too long, but I can’t stand by and let you hurt innocent people.”
“Innocent?” Morgan scoffed, his voice dripping with contempt. “These are pirates and criminals. They deserve nothing but punishment.”
“Rika isn’t a criminal,” Aiko shot back, her voice gaining strength. “She’s just a little girl trying to do what’s right. And Zoro... I don’t know what he’s done in the past, but I can see he’s not the monster you make him out to be.”
Morgan’s face twisted with anger, his free hand clenching into a fist. “You dare to defy me, Aiko? After all I’ve done for you?”
“You haven’t done anything for me,” Aiko said, her voice steady despite the fear churning in her chest. “You’ve only ruled through fear and intimidation. That’s not justice. That’s tyranny.”

Luffy let out a laugh, breaking the tension. “I like her,” he said, flashing Aiko a grin. “You should join my crew too.”
Aiko blinked, caught off guard by his sudden remark. “W-what? I can’t—”
“You don’t have to decide now,” Luffy said, his grin unwavering. “But I can tell you’ve got a good heart. That’s what matters.”
Morgan’s patience snapped. With a roar of fury, he swung his axe-hand toward Luffy. Aiko moved on instinct, drawing her sword and stepping in front of him. The clash of steel echoed through the courtyard as she blocked the blow, her arms trembling under the force.

The Marines around them watched in stunned silence as Aiko stood her ground, her pink hair glinting in the sunlight. For a moment, even Morgan seemed taken aback by her defiance.
“You’re making a big mistake, Aiko,” Morgan growled, his voice low and dangerous. “One you won’t live to regret.”
“I’ve already made my choice,” Aiko replied, her voice steady. “And I won’t back down.”
As if spurred on by her courage, Luffy leaped into action. His rubber limbs stretched in impossible ways as he launched a counterattack, knocking Morgan off balance. The Marines scrambled to respond, but Coby—and even Helmeppo—hesitated, caught between their duty and their conscience.
Zoro watched the chaos with a smirk, his respect for both Luffy and Aiko growing with each passing moment. “Maybe this kid isn’t as crazy as I thought,” he muttered under his breath.

 

The clang of steel echoed through the Marine courtyard as Aiko braced herself, her sword trembling slightly under the weight of Captain Morgan’s axe-hand. Though her arms ached from the sheer force of his strike, she held her ground. Her pink hair caught the sunlight, beads of sweat trickling down her forehead.
Luffy leapt backward, landing lightly beside her. “Nice block!” he said, his grin wide. “You’re stronger than you think.”
Aiko’s heart raced as she glanced at him. She had never thought of herself as particularly brave, yet here she was, standing shoulder to shoulder with a boy who had no fear of Captain Morgan. For the first time, she felt the spark of something she couldn’t quite name—maybe courage, maybe resolve.
“Stay out of this!” Morgan roared, pulling his axe-hand back for another swing. His anger seemed to radiate off him in waves, filling the courtyard with suffocating tension.

“She’s not going anywhere,” Luffy declared, stepping forward. His expression was calm but determined. “And neither am I.”
Before Morgan could strike again, a loud voice interrupted them.
“Father, stop this madness!” Helmeppo shouted, his face pale, sweat beading on his brow. He stood a short distance away, his trembling hands clenched at his sides.
Morgan turned on his son, his expression twisting with fury. “Helmeppo, you worthless brat! Are you defying me too?”
Helmeppo flinched but stood his ground. “I—I’m just saying there’s no need for this! You’ve already proven your power. Let them go, and—”
“Silence!” Morgan barked, his voice reverberating across the yard. “You’re an embarrassment to the Marines, Helmeppo. You’ve always been weak, and now you’re showing it in front of everyone.”

Aiko’s chest tightened as she watched Helmeppo shrink under his father’s words. She had seen him act arrogant and spoiled countless times, but now, for the first time, she saw him for what he truly was: a boy desperate for his father’s approval.
“Helmeppo,” she said softly, her voice cutting through the tension. “You don’t have to follow his example. You can make your own choices.”
Helmeppo looked at her, his eyes wide with a mix of fear and uncertainty. “Aiko, I... I don’t know if I can.”
“Yes, you can,” she said firmly. “I believe in you.”
Helmeppo’s hands clenched tighter, his expression hardening. For a brief moment, it seemed as though he might take a stand. But before he could speak, Morgan charged forward, his axe-hand aimed directly at Aiko.

 

Aiko raised her sword, ready to block again, but before she could react, a flash of movement caught her eye. Luffy’s rubber arms stretched out, wrapping around Morgan’s axe-hand and yanking it to the side. The blow missed its mark, slamming into the ground with a deafening crash.
“Not bad, Straw Hat,” Zoro called from his post, a smirk tugging at his lips. “But if you really want to win this, you’re going to need my help.”
Luffy turned to him, his grin returning. “Does that mean you’ll join my crew?”
Zoro chuckled. “Let me out of these ropes first, and we’ll talk.”
“Deal!” Luffy said, rushing toward Zoro. He quickly untied the ropes, and Zoro stretched his arms with a sigh of relief.
“About time,” Zoro muttered, cracking his neck. He turned to Morgan, his expression deadly serious. “You’ve got some nerve, treating people like this.”
Morgan sneered. “And what are you going to do about it, pirate hunter? You’re nothing but a washed-up swordsman.”
Zoro’s hand moved to the hilt of one of his swords, discarded by a Marine nearby. In one swift motion, he unsheathed it and pointed it at Morgan. “Let’s find out.”

 

The courtyard erupted into chaos as Zoro and Luffy worked together to take on Morgan and his Marines. Zoro’s precise swordsmanship and Luffy’s unpredictable Devil Fruit powers made an unstoppable combination, leaving the Marines scrambling to keep up.
Aiko watched in awe as the tide began to turn. She had never seen anyone stand up to Morgan like this, let alone win. Her grip on her sword tightened—this was her chance to make a difference.

 

As the dust settled, Morgan lay defeated, his axe-hand shattered and his pride in ruins. The remaining Marines hesitated, unsure whether to continue the fight or surrender.
“That was fun,” Luffy said, stretching. “So, Zoro, what do you say?”
Zoro smirked. “I’ll join your crew. But don’t think this means I’m your subordinate.”
“Deal!” Luffy laughed.
Aiko approached cautiously. “You... you really did it,” she said softly.
“Of course!” Luffy grinned. “And you helped, Aiko. You’re strong.”
Aiko hesitated, then smiled. Maybe she really was.

 

The docks of Shells Town were alive with commotion. The townsfolk had gathered in numbers, whispering in amazement and relief. Captain Morgan’s reign of terror was over, and the oppressive grip of his rule had finally been lifted.
Standing near the edge of the dock, Coby adjusted his small Marine cap nervously, watching as Monkey D. Luffy and Roronoa Zoro prepared to set sail in a small dinghy. Aiko stood nearby, her sword sheathed at her side, her pink hair rustling in the breeze.
“Aiko, you’re really going with them, aren’t you?” Rika asked, her wide eyes shimmering with emotion as she clutched her mother’s hand.

Aiko glanced toward the boat, where Luffy was helping Zoro load supplies with the same carefree energy he’d displayed all day. Her gaze then shifted to Coby, who stood awkwardly with his hands clasped in front of him. He looked like he wanted to speak but didn’t know how to begin.
“Yes,” Aiko said at last, her voice soft but steady. “I think I have to.”
“You don’t have to do anything you’re not ready for,” Coby blurted out, stepping forward. His face was a mix of determination and worry. “It’s okay to want to stay here. You’re not weak for staying behind.”
Aiko smiled gently, touched by his concern. “It’s not about running away or staying behind, Coby. It’s about finding out who I really am. I’ve lived in this town my whole life, and I’ve always wondered if there’s more out there. I think this is my chance to find out.”
Coby looked down at his shoes, his brow furrowing. “I… I know how that feels,” he admitted. “To want more. But it’s scary, isn’t it? Leaving everything you know behind?”
“It is,” Aiko replied honestly. “But it’s even scarier to think about staying and never knowing what I could have become.”

 

As the conversation unfolded, Luffy approached them, his straw hat tilted back as he beamed at Aiko. “So, have you decided yet?” he asked, his tone as casual as if they were discussing lunch.
Aiko hesitated, glancing back at the crowd behind her. Helmeppo stood near the edge of the pier, his expression conflicted. Despite his flaws, she knew he truly cared about her and would miss her terribly. Rika, standing beside her mother, waved eagerly, her faith in Aiko shining brightly in her innocent smile.
“Yes,” Aiko said at last, turning back to Luffy. “I’ll come with you.”
Luffy’s grin widened. “Great! Welcome to the crew, Aiko!”
Zoro, who had been leaning casually against the boat, raised an eyebrow. “She’d better pull her weight,” he remarked, though there was no malice in his tone. “This isn’t going to be some sightseeing tour.”
“I’ll do my best,” Aiko promised, her hand instinctively resting on the hilt of her sword. She wasn’t sure if she truly had what it took, but she was determined to try.
“Wait,” Coby interrupted, his voice shaky but firm. He stepped in front of Aiko, his small frame almost trembling. “Aiko, are you sure this is what you want? I mean, being a pirate… it’s dangerous. It’s not just adventures and freedom—it’s fighting, running, and risking your life every day.”
Aiko looked at him, her expression soft but resolute. “I know, Coby. But I’ve learned today that being strong isn’t just about fighting. It’s about standing up for what you believe in, even when it’s scary. I want to be strong—like you, like Luffy, like Zoro. I want to see the world and figure out who I’m meant to be.”
Coby’s shoulders slumped slightly, his worry evident. But after a moment, he nodded. “Then… good luck, Aiko. I hope you find what you’re looking for.”

 

The small boat rocked gently as Aiko climbed in, her sword clinking softly against the wooden boards. She turned back to the dock one last time, her heart heavy with the bittersweet emotions of saying goodbye.
Rika waved with all her might, her voice ringing out over the chatter of the crowd. “Goodbye, Aiko! Be amazing!”
Aiko smiled, a tear slipping down her cheek as she raised her hand in farewell. “Goodbye, Rika. I’ll see you again.”
Helmeppo remained at the back of the crowd, his head bowed slightly. He glanced up just in time to meet Aiko’s gaze, giving her a small, hesitant wave. She nodded in return, silently urging him to find his own strength.

Luffy, now seated at the front of the boat, turned to Coby, who stood stiffly at the dock’s edge. “What about you, Coby? Want to come with us?”
Coby startled, his eyes widening. “W-what? Me? No, I-I can’t! I mean… I have to stay here. I want to join the Marines and make something of myself.”
“Good luck with that!” Luffy said cheerfully, giving him a thumbs-up. “I know you’ll do great.”
“Thanks, Luffy,” Coby said, his voice earnest. “And… thank you. For everything.”
With that, Zoro gave the rope a firm tug, and the boat drifted away from the dock. The crowd erupted into cheers as the small crew set out to sea, their voices carrying across the water. Aiko watched the shoreline grow smaller, her heart a mix of fear and exhilaration.
“So,” Zoro said, breaking the silence. “Why’d you decide to come with us?”

Aiko hesitated, her hand resting on her sword as she stared out at the endless horizon. “I guess I wanted to see what’s out there. To find out what I’m really capable of.”
Luffy grinned, leaning back with his hands behind his head. “Well, you’re going to love it! Being a pirate means being free. We’re going to have so many adventures!”
Aiko couldn’t help but smile, her nerves beginning to fade. She still didn’t know what the future held, but for the first time, she felt like she was exactly where she was meant to be.

As the boat sailed into the vast blue expanse, Aiko’s heart swelled with a newfound sense of hope. Her journey had only just begun, but she knew she was ready to face whatever lay ahead—together with her new crew.
And so, with the sun setting behind them, Luffy, Zoro, and Aiko set sail for their next adventure, leaving Shells Town behind and carrying with them the promise of freedom, friendship, and a new beginning.

Chapter 2: Aiko’s Journey Begins: A Fight She’ll Never Forget

Summary:

“I’m not brave… but I won’t let my friends get hurt.”

Notes:

The next chapter will probably be published next week.

Chapter Text

The waves lapped gently against the small boat as it bobbed along the vast, open sea. Monkey D. Luffy sat cross-legged at the bow, his straw hat tipped back as he gazed at the endless blue horizon with a wide grin. Beside him, Roronoa Zoro leaned back casually, arms crossed, his swords resting against his hip. Aiko sat near the stern, her pink hair loosely tied back, her sword resting against the wooden side of the boat.

The silence of the ocean was broken only by the rhythmic creak of the boat and the occasional cry of a seagull. Unfamiliar with the vastness of the sea, Aiko tried to suppress the nervous energy bubbling in her chest. She glanced at Luffy, whose carefree grin remained untouched by the uncertainty of their direction, then at Zoro, whose calm demeanor revealed nothing of what he might be thinking.

Aiko spoke first, her voice hesitant as she broke the quiet. “Do… do we even know where we’re going?”
Luffy turned to her, his grin widening. “Not really! But that’s the fun part, right? You never know what you’ll find out here.”
Aiko blinked, her brows knitting together. “You don’t even have a map?”
“Who needs a map?” Luffy laughed, stretching his arms back casually. “We’ll figure it out as we go.”
“Great,” Zoro muttered dryly. “We’re lost, and it hasn’t even been a full day.”
“Not lost,” Luffy corrected cheerfully. “Just exploring.”
Aiko sighed, running a hand through her hair. “I thought pirates were supposed to be organized. Or at least have a plan.”
“Organized?” Zoro echoed, raising an eyebrow at her. “You really don’t know much about pirates, do you?”
Aiko flushed slightly. “I guess not. I’ve never been one before.”
“Well, you picked an interesting crew to start with,” Zoro said, smirking faintly.
Luffy beamed at the comment. “We’re the best crew there is! And we’re just getting started.”

 

The conversation drifted into a comfortable lull. Aiko glanced out at the water, marveling at how endless it seemed. Back in Shells Town, the sea had always felt like a distant mystery—something she admired from afar but never dreamed of crossing. Now, sitting in this tiny boat with two of the strangest people she’d ever met, the vastness of it was both exhilarating and terrifying.
“What made you want to be King of the Pirates, anyway?” Aiko asked suddenly, looking at Luffy. It was a question that had been gnawing at her since the moment they’d met.

Luffy’s grin softened slightly, turning more reflective. He adjusted his straw hat and stared out at the horizon. “It’s my dream,” he said simply. “The biggest dream there is. I want to find the One Piece and be the freest person in the world.”
Aiko tilted her head, intrigued. “The freest person?”
“Yeah,” Luffy said, his voice filled with quiet determination. “That’s what being King of the Pirates means. No one can tell you what to do, where to go, or how to live. You get to decide everything for yourself.”

Aiko’s chest tightened at his words. Freedom. It was something she had never really thought about before—at least, not in the way Luffy described it. Her life in Shells Town had been safe and predictable, but it had also been small. She had never dared to imagine a life without boundaries.
“What about you?” Luffy asked, tilting his head toward her. “What’s your dream?”
Aiko hesitated, fidgeting with the hem of her dress. “I… don’t know,” she admitted. “I guess I’ve never really thought about it. I just wanted to see what else was out there.”

“Well, that’s a good start!” Luffy said, his grin returning. “You’ll figure it out.”
Zoro opened one eye, glancing at her. “Just make sure you’re ready for whatever comes next. The sea isn’t all sunsets and adventure. It’s dangerous.”
“I know,” Aiko said quietly, her grip tightening on her sword. “But I think I’m ready.”
“We’ll see,” Zoro said, closing his eyes again.

 

As the hours passed, the sun climbed higher into the sky, its golden rays sparkling on the waves. Aiko had started to relax, her earlier nerves fading as she got used to the rhythm of the boat. But her newfound calm was interrupted by a shout from Luffy.
“Look! Another boat!” he exclaimed, pointing excitedly.
Aiko and Zoro turned to see a small sailboat approaching from the distance. The boat was sleek and well-kept, and at its helm stood a woman with vibrant orange hair. She maneuvered the boat expertly, her sharp eyes scanning the trio with a mix of curiosity and caution.
“Who’s that?” Aiko asked, sitting up straighter.

“No idea,” Zoro said, reaching instinctively for his swords. “But we’d better be ready.”
As the sailboat drew closer, the woman called out, her voice carrying easily over the water. “Hey there! Are you pirates?”
Luffy stood up, cupping his hands around his mouth. “Yeah! I’m Monkey D. Luffy, and I’m going to be King of the Pirates!”
Aiko blinked, her heart skipping a beat. “Should you really be telling strangers that?”
Zoro groaned, shaking his head. “Subtle as ever.”
The woman raised an eyebrow, a sly smile playing on her lips. “King of the Pirates, huh? That’s a pretty big claim. Do you have any treasure to back it up?”
“Not yet,” Luffy admitted with a laugh. “But I will!”

The woman chuckled, her smile widening. “You’re an interesting bunch. Mind if I tag along? The sea’s safer in numbers.”
Luffy didn’t hesitate. “Sure! Come aboard!”
“What?!” Aiko and Zoro exclaimed in unison.
“You can’t just invite anyone onto the boat!” Aiko added, her voice tinged with panic.
“She might be a thief,” Zoro said flatly, eyeing the woman with suspicion.

“Well, yeah,” the woman said, unfazed. “That’s sort of the point, isn’t it? My name’s Nami, by the way. Let’s just say I’ve got a knack for navigating.”
Luffy beamed. “Welcome to the crew, Nami!”
Nami climbed aboard with ease, her movements graceful and confident. She looked around the boat, taking in her new companions with an appraising glance. “This should be fun,” she said, her voice light but calculated.
Aiko crossed her arms, still unsure about the newcomer. “Just don’t try anything funny.”
Nami smirked. “Relax. I’m just here for the ride… for now.”

 

The small boat swayed gently as it approached the coast. Luffy stood at the bow, his straw hat tilted forward to shield his eyes from the sun. His enthusiasm was palpable, his grin widening as he caught sight of the cluster of buildings along the shoreline.
“Land ho!” Luffy cheered, pointing dramatically toward the distant town.
Zoro, who had been resting with his arms crossed, opened one eye and sighed. “You’re acting like you’ve never seen land before.”
Aiko, seated beside Zoro with her sword across her lap, leaned forward to get a better look. Her pink hair blew gently in the salty breeze as she squinted at the quiet town. “It looks… deserted.”

Nami, who had taken over steering the boat, smirked faintly. “I wonder why.” Her tone was laced with sarcasm as she gestured toward the docks, where tattered posters of a grinning clown adorned the walls. “Looks like this town belongs to Buggy the Clown.”
“Buggy the Clown?” Aiko repeated, furrowing her brows. “Who’s that?”
“He’s a pirate,” Zoro said flatly. “A nasty one.”
“And a big deal in these parts,” Nami added, her expression unreadable. “If he’s here, this town is in trouble.”
Luffy tilted his head, his grin undeterred. “Perfect! Let’s go meet him.”
“Are you serious?” Aiko asked, her eyes wide. “You want to meet the pirate who’s taken over this town?”
“Yeah,” Luffy said simply. “He sounds fun.”
Zoro groaned, rubbing his temples. “You’re going to get us killed.”

 

As the group disembarked, the eerie silence of the town became more pronounced. The streets were empty, the windows of the buildings were boarded up, and the posters of Buggy’s grinning face flapped gently in the wind.
“This place is giving me the creeps,” Aiko murmured, her hand resting on the hilt of her sword. “Where is everyone?”
“Hiding,” Nami said matter-of-factly. “And with good reason. Buggy’s not the kind of pirate you want to cross.”
“Then why are we here?” Aiko asked, glancing nervously at her companions.
“Treasure,” Nami said with a smirk. “Every pirate town has it, and if Buggy’s hoarding it, I plan to take it.”
“Of course you do,” Zoro muttered, shaking his head.

As they ventured further into the town, the oppressive silence was broken by the distant sound of laughter. The group stopped in their tracks, listening intently as the sound grew louder.
“What’s that?” Aiko asked, her voice barely above a whisper.
“Buggy’s crew,” Nami said, her eyes narrowing. “Looks like we’ve found them.”
Luffy grinned, his excitement growing. “Let’s go say hi!”
Before anyone could stop him, Luffy marched confidently toward the source of the noise. Zoro sighed heavily, muttering something under his breath as he followed. Aiko hesitated, glancing at Nami, who rolled her eyes.
“We’d better follow him,” Nami said, her tone resigned. “Or he’s going to get himself killed.”
Aiko nodded, her heart pounding as she gripped her sword tightly and hurried after them.

 

The group rounded a corner and found themselves in the town square, where a group of Buggy’s pirates were gathered around a large cannon. At the center of the chaos sat Buggy himself, his bright red nose and garish outfit making him impossible to miss. He lounged on a makeshift throne, tossing a knife idly in one hand as he laughed maniacally.
“Well, well,” Buggy said, his voice booming across the square. “Look what the sea brought in! A bunch of fools who think they can waltz into my town and take me on.”
“We’re not here to take you on,” Luffy said cheerfully, stepping forward. “We just wanted to say hi.”
Buggy stared at him, his grin faltering for a moment before twisting into something more sinister. “You’ve got guts, Straw Hat. I’ll give you that. But you’re in my territory now, and no one walks away without paying the price.”

Zoro stepped forward, his swords at the ready. “We’re not afraid of you, Buggy.”
Buggy laughed, the sound echoing eerily in the empty square. “Big talk from the infamous pirate hunter. What’s the matter, Zoro? Couldn’t make it on your own, so you joined a crew of misfits?”
Zoro’s grip on his swords tightened, but he said nothing.
Buggy’s gaze shifted to Aiko, who stood behind Luffy with her sword drawn. “And who’s this little girl? A wannabe swordsman? You’re out of your league, kid.”
Aiko’s cheeks flushed, but she stood her ground. “I’m not afraid of you.”
Buggy’s grin widened. “Oh, I like you. You’ve got spirit. Too bad you’re in the wrong place at the wrong time.”
Before anyone could react, Buggy raised his hand and shouted, “Buggy Ball, fire!”

The cannon roared to life, sending a massive cannonball hurtling toward them. Aiko barely had time to dive out of the way as the explosion sent debris flying in all directions. She landed hard on the ground, her ears ringing as she scrambled to her feet.
“Is he insane?!” she shouted, gripping her sword tightly.
“Completely,” Zoro muttered, his eyes locked on Buggy.
Luffy dusted himself off, his grin never wavering. “This is going to be fun!”
And with that, the battle for Orange Town began.

 

As the dust settled, Buggy’s crew charged forward, weapons raised and laughter echoing through the square. Luffy, Zoro, Aiko, and Nami stood together, ready to face whatever came next. Though Aiko’s hands trembled slightly, she steeled herself, determined not to let fear hold her back.
“I hope you’re ready, Aiko,” Zoro said, glancing at her. “This isn’t a game.”
“I know,” Aiko said, her voice steady despite her nerves. “Let’s do this.”

 

Buggy’s crew surged forward—a motley group of pirates wielding swords, clubs, and all manner of makeshift weapons. They charged with wild laughter and jeering shouts, a chaotic wave of energy threatening to overwhelm.
Zoro moved first, his swords slicing through the air with precision. He cut through the first wave of attackers effortlessly, his movements fluid and deliberate. The clash of steel echoed around him, but his calm demeanor never wavered, even as more pirates pressed in.
Luffy leapt into the fray next, his rubber limbs stretching impossibly far as he slammed his fist into a pirate’s face.
“Gomu Gomu no Pistol!” he shouted, sending the pirate flying into a pile of barrels. His grin never faltered as he weaved through the chaos, his unique fighting style leaving Buggy’s men disoriented and scrambling.

Aiko took a deep breath, tightening her grip on her sword as a large, burly pirate charged toward her with a spiked club. Fueled by adrenaline and instinct, she sidestepped his swing, the club missing her by inches. She countered with a quick slash, the edge of her blade grazing his arm and forcing him to stagger back.
“Not bad, little girl,” the pirate growled, narrowing his eyes. “But you’ll have to do better than that.”
“I plan to,” Aiko shot back, surprising herself with the firmness in her voice. She steadied her stance, remembering Zoro’s earlier advice: Keep your feet planted. Don’t hesitate. When the pirate lunged again, she parried his attack with more confidence, pushing back against the force of his swings.

Nearby, Nami watched the fight unfold, her expression skeptical but intrigued. She ducked behind a stack of crates, her sharp eyes scanning the square.
“Idiots,” she muttered under her breath. “This isn’t just chaos. It’s a distraction.”
Her gaze landed on the massive cannon that Buggy’s crew had prepared for another shot. With the pirates distracted by Luffy, Zoro, and Aiko, an idea lit up in Nami’s mind. Adjusting her grip on the sack of stolen treasure she had taken earlier, she began sneaking toward the cannon.

 

Buggy remained seated on his throne, his grin widening as he watched his crew struggle against the newcomers.
“Not bad,” he mused aloud. “But let’s see how you handle this.”
With a flourish, Buggy stood and extended his hands dramatically. His fingers suddenly detached from his hands, floating ominously in the air before shooting toward Luffy like arrows.

“Whoa!” Luffy exclaimed, dodging as the detached fingers whizzed past him. “What the—? Your fingers can fly?”
Buggy cackled. “I ate the Chop-Chop Fruit, you fool! I’m a man who can’t be cut or defeated!”
Zoro’s eyes narrowed as he observed Buggy’s floating limbs. “A Devil Fruit user, huh? This just got more complicated.”

Aiko’s breath caught as she watched Buggy’s fingers twist through the air, moving independently to attack. “How do we even fight something like that?”
“We just do,” Luffy said simply, grinning. “Zoro, take care of his crew. I’ll handle the clown!”
Zoro nodded, turning back to the remaining pirates who were still pressing their attack. Aiko hesitated for a moment, unsure where she would be most useful, before steeling herself and stepping in to help Zoro.
“I’ve got your back,” she said, raising her sword.
Zoro smirked. “Good. Just don’t get in my way.”

 

While the battle raged on, Nami reached the cannon undetected. She examined it quickly, her mind racing as she tried to figure out how to disable it. She didn’t trust Luffy or his strange crew entirely, but she knew one thing: if Buggy fired another cannonball, they were all in trouble.
“Let’s see,” Nami muttered, running her fingers along the cannon’s mechanisms. “If I just—”
“Hey! What are you doing over there?” a pirate shouted, spotting her.
Nami froze for a split second before flashing a confident smile. “Me? Oh, I was just admiring your cannon. It’s very impressive.”
“Get away from that!” the pirate yelled, charging toward her.
Nami cursed under her breath and quickly pulled a dagger from her belt. She wasn’t much of a fighter, but she wasn’t about to let some low-level pirate stop her.
“Sorry, buddy,” she said, throwing a sack of treasure at his head before ducking away. “Gotta run!”

 

Buggy’s laughter echoed through the square, carrying a sinister edge as his dismembered limbs floated in the air like grotesque puppets. He grinned wildly, reveling in the chaos he had unleashed. His crew had retreated slightly after Zoro’s overwhelming display of swordsmanship and Luffy’s devastating punches, but the fight was far from over.
Aiko, sword in hand, stood with her back to Zoro, both of them fending off the remaining pirates who hesitated to charge in but didn’t back down completely. Nami remained near the cannon, nervously watching as the battle played out, her sharp mind racing for a way to turn the tide in their favor.
“This is getting ridiculous,” Aiko muttered, sweat beading on her forehead as she parried another attack from a persistent pirate. “Does this guy ever stop laughing?”
Zoro smirked, slicing through an opponent with practiced ease. “It’s his thing. Don’t let it get to you.”
Buggy’s voice rose above the sound of clashing steel.

“What’s the matter, Straw Hat? Too scared to fight me head-on? Afraid of my power?”
Luffy didn’t flinch. “You’re not scary. You’re annoying.” He stretched his arms back, his rubbery body twisting as he prepared to attack.
“Gomu Gomu no Bazooka!”
With incredible force, Luffy’s stretched hands slammed into Buggy, sending the clown captain flying into a pile of crates. For a moment, the square went silent, save for the creak of shattered wood and the faint groans of Buggy’s crew.
Nami raised an eyebrow, impressed despite herself. “Not bad,” she muttered under her breath.
But Buggy was far from finished. The dismembered parts of his body floated back together, reassembling with eerie precision. His grin returned, wider and more deranged than before.
“You think you can beat me so easily? Foolish boy! I’m Buggy the Clown, and I never lose!”

 

Buggy’s crew, emboldened by their captain’s resilience, surged forward once more. Aiko found herself surrounded by two pirates, their weapons raised as they closed in on her. Her pulse quickened, but she remembered Zoro’s earlier advice: Keep your stance firm and your focus sharp.
The first pirate lunged, and Aiko sidestepped, using the momentum to strike at his side. The flat of her blade connected, sending him stumbling to the ground. The second pirate hesitated, giving Aiko just enough time to pivot and disarm him with a swift slash.
“Not bad, rookie,” Zoro said, glancing over his shoulder as he blocked an attack. “You’re starting to get the hang of it.”
Aiko managed a small smile, her confidence growing despite the chaos around her. “Thanks. Just don’t let your guard down.”
“Never do,” Zoro replied, smirking.

Meanwhile, Buggy turned his attention to Luffy, his detached hands flying toward the straw-hatted boy like missiles. Luffy dodged effortlessly, his rubbery limbs twisting and stretching as he retaliated with a series of quick punches.
“Gomu Gomu no Gatling!”
Buggy snarled, his floating body parts dodging the attack with surprising agility. “You’re fast, Straw Hat, but let’s see how you handle this!”
With a flick of his wrist, Buggy’s detached hand grabbed a dagger and hurled it toward Luffy. Before the blade could reach its mark, Aiko darted forward, using her sword to deflect it mid-air.
“Watch it!” Aiko shouted, her breath heavy as she turned to Luffy. “He’s targeting you directly!”
Luffy grinned, unfazed. “Thanks, Aiko! Let’s finish him together!”

 

As the battle raged on, Nami crept closer to Buggy’s cannon, her mind racing as she studied the intricate mechanism. She had always been resourceful, and now was no different. If she could disable the cannon—or, even better, use it to her advantage—then they might have a chance to end this fight once and for all.
“Let’s see,” Nami muttered, her fingers working quickly as she adjusted the cannon’s angle. “If I can just... there.”
“Hey! What are you doing?!” one of Buggy’s men shouted, spotting her.
Nami didn’t hesitate. She swung the sack of treasure she had pilfered earlier, the weight of it knocking the pirate to the ground. “Mind your own business,” she snapped, turning back to the cannon.

By the time Buggy noticed her, it was too late. Nami had aimed the cannon directly at him, her smirk widening as she lit the fuse. “Catch this, clown.”
The cannon fired with a deafening roar, the projectile hurtling toward Buggy at incredible speed. His eyes widened in shock as he tried to dodge, but the blast caught him square in the chest, sending him flying into the air.

 

Buggy landed in a heap, his body parts scattering across the square. For a moment, all was silent. His crew, seeing their captain in pieces—literally—began to panic.
“This isn’t over!” Buggy sputtered, his floating head glaring at them as he struggled to reassemble with the rest of his body. “I’ll—”
“Gomu Gomu no Rocket!” Luffy shouted, launching himself forward and slamming into Buggy’s head with enough force to send it rolling across the square.
With Buggy incapacitated, his crew quickly scattered, their morale shattered without their leader. The square grew quiet once more, the dust settling as the townsfolk cautiously emerged from their hiding places.

 

Aiko leaned against her sword, her chest heaving as she tried to catch her breath. “Is it… over?” she asked, glancing at Zoro.
“For now,” Zoro replied, sliding his swords back into their sheaths. “Good work.”
Nami approached, dusting off her hands with a satisfied grin. “Looks like I saved the day.”
“You did great!” Luffy said cheerfully, flashing her a thumbs-up. “You’re really smart.”
Nami rolled her eyes but couldn’t hide the faint smile on her lips. “Yeah, yeah. Don’t get used to it.”

As the townsfolk began to gather around them, their expressions filled with gratitude, Aiko couldn’t help but smile. She had faced her first real battle and come out stronger. Though her journey had only just begun, she felt a newfound sense of purpose—and belonging—among this strange crew.
Luffy turned to her, his grin as wide as ever. “See? I told you adventures are fun.”
Aiko laughed softly, shaking her head. “You have a strange definition of fun, Luffy.”
“Get used to it,” Zoro said, smirking. “It only gets crazier from here.”
And with that, the crew began to make their way back to the boat, ready to set sail once more—this time, with a few extra coins in their pockets and a new story to tell.

Chapter 3: Finding My Place

Summary:

“I don’t know where I belong… but maybe with them, I’ll find out.”

Notes:

Hi guys
I hope you like this chapter and the story in general.
The next chapter will maybe come today or tomorrow.
:)

Chapter Text

The golden sunlight reflected off the vast ocean, casting its glittering glow upon the small boat as it drifted steadily across the waves. Luffy sat cross-legged at the bow, his straw hat shielding his eyes from the sun. His usual grin was present, but there was a softness to his expression—a faraway look that Aiko hadn’t seen before. She sat near the stern, hugging her knees and fidgeting with the edge of her white dress, a nervous habit she hadn’t quite grown out of.

 

The open ocean still made her uneasy. Its vastness overwhelmed her, stretching endlessly in all directions without a single landmark or safe harbor in sight. She kept stealing glances at the horizon, half-expecting a sudden storm or a monstrous sea creature to appear out of nowhere. Her thoughts swirled with worst-case scenarios, as they so often did.

 

Nami, seated near the center of the boat, was completely focused on the map spread out before her, muttering calculations under her breath as she charted their next course. Zoro, meanwhile, reclined with his arms crossed and eyes closed, looking every bit the picture of calm. Aiko envied that calmness, though she doubted she’d ever be able to imitate it.

“Hey, Aiko,” Nami’s voice broke through her spiral of anxious thoughts. “You’re awfully quiet. Everything okay?”
Aiko flinched slightly at being addressed. “Oh, um… y-yes. I’m fine,” she stammered, though her tightened grip on her knees betrayed her nerves.
Nami gave her a look, clearly unconvinced. “You don’t look fine. You look like you’re expecting something to jump out of the water and eat us.”
Aiko’s cheeks flushed. “It’s just… we’re so far from land. What if something happens? What if a storm hits, or—”
“Nothing’s going to happen,” Zoro interrupted, his eyes still closed. “And if it does, panicking won’t help. Relax.”
Aiko frowned, hugging her knees tighter. “Easy for you to say. You’re not the one constantly worrying.”
“That’s because worrying is pointless,” Zoro said bluntly. “We’ll deal with whatever comes our way. That’s how life works.”
Aiko didn’t respond, but her frown deepened. She knew Zoro was right in theory, but it didn’t make her fears go away. She glanced at Luffy, hoping his usual optimism might offer some reassurance. However, to her surprise, he wasn’t his usual cheerful self.

 

Luffy sat still, gazing at the horizon with an uncharacteristically thoughtful expression. His straw hat tilted forward, partially obscuring his face. Aiko tilted her head, studying him curiously. It wasn’t like Luffy to stay so quiet for so long.
“Luffy?” she called hesitantly. “Are… are you okay?”
Luffy blinked as though snapping out of a trance and turned to her with his trademark grin. “Huh? Yeah, I’m fine!”
Aiko furrowed her brow. “You seem… different. Like something’s on your mind.”
Nami glanced up from her charts, her curiosity piqued. “She’s right. You’ve been unusually quiet. That’s not like you.”
Luffy shrugged, adjusting the brim of his hat. “I was just thinking about Shanks.”
“Shanks?” Nami repeated, raising an eyebrow. “Who’s that?”
“Red-Haired Shanks,” Zoro said, opening one eye. His tone held a hint of surprise. “You mean one of the Four Emperors?”
“Yep!” Luffy said, his grin widening. “He wasn’t an Emperor back then, though. He was just a captain with the coolest crew ever.”
Nami’s eyes narrowed suspiciously. “You knew him?”
“Not just knew him,” Luffy said proudly. “He’s the reason I decided to become a pirate.”
The group fell quiet, the weight of Luffy’s words settling over the boat. Even Zoro straightened slightly, his curiosity getting the better of him. Aiko, despite her usual shyness, found herself leaning forward, eager to hear more.
“What was he like?” she asked softly.

Luffy’s face lit up as he launched into his story. “Shanks was amazing! He was strong, fearless, and always laughing. He and his crew would come to my village sometimes, and they were the coolest people I’d ever met. I wanted to be just like them.”
“You wanted to join a pirate crew as a kid?” Nami asked incredulously.
“Yup!” Luffy said with a grin. “But Shanks wouldn’t let me. He said I was too young.”
“Sounds like he was protecting you,” Aiko murmured, her gaze thoughtful.
“Maybe,” Luffy admitted. “But back then, I didn’t see it that way. I thought he was just being mean.”
Zoro smirked faintly. “So, what changed?”
Luffy’s grin softened, and his gaze turned distant once more. “One day, a group of bandits came to the village. Their leader, Higuma, was a real jerk. He tried to pick a fight with Shanks at the bar, but Shanks just laughed it off.”
“He laughed?” Aiko asked, tilting her head in surprise. “Even when they were threatening him?”
“Yeah,” Luffy said, chuckling at the memory. “That’s just how Shanks was. He didn’t care what people thought of him. But I didn’t get it back then. I thought he was being a coward, so I yelled at him.”

“And what did he do?” Nami asked, crossing her arms.
“He just kept laughing,” Luffy said, shaking his head. “Shanks didn’t fight back because he didn’t need to. He knew what was important—and picking a fight with Higuma wasn’t worth it.”
As Luffy continued his story, Aiko couldn’t help but feel a mix of awe and envy. Shanks sounded like the kind of person she could never be: fearless, confident, unshaken by anyone or anything. Even Luffy, despite his occasional recklessness, seemed to carry that same unshakable resolve.
Aiko, on the other hand, felt like her life was ruled by fear. Fear of failure, fear of danger, fear of the unknown. She had joined Luffy’s crew because she wanted to find her strength, but now she wondered if she was too weak to ever reach it.
Still, as she listened to Luffy speak, a flicker of something stirred in her chest—a tiny ember of hope. Maybe, just maybe, if she stayed with this crew, she could find the courage she lacked.

 

The soft creaking of the boat was the only sound for a moment, as Luffy paused in his story. His usual energy was subdued, replaced with quiet reflection, as if he were carefully turning over old memories in his mind. The rest of the crew waited in silence, sensing that the story was about to take a darker turn.
“Higuma didn’t stop with just trying to scare Shanks,” Luffy began again, his voice quieter now. “He came back later—angrier, more desperate. And that’s when everything really went bad.”
“What happened?” Nami asked, setting her map aside. Despite her usual aloofness, she was genuinely curious.
“Higuma kidnapped me,” Luffy said, his smile fading entirely. “He dragged me out to sea, thinking he could use me as leverage or something. But then… he threw me into the water.”

Aiko’s breath caught in her throat. “But… you’re a Devil Fruit user. That means you can’t—”
“Swim,” Luffy finished for her, nodding. “Yeah. I was sinking like a rock. I thought I was done for.”
“Let me guess,” Zoro said, his tone calm but serious. “Shanks came after you.”
Luffy’s expression softened into something bittersweet. “Yeah. He showed up just in time. But then… a sea king appeared.”
“A sea king?” Aiko echoed, her eyes widening in fear. The idea of a massive, monstrous creature lurking in the depths was almost too much for her to fathom. She tightened her grip on her knees, trying to suppress the shiver that ran through her.
“Yeah,” Luffy said. “It was huge. Bigger than anything I’d ever seen. I thought it was going to eat me.”
“What happened?” Nami asked, leaning forward slightly.

“Shanks jumped in,” Luffy said, his voice filled with quiet reverence. “He didn’t hesitate for even a second. He saved me… but he lost his arm.”
Aiko stared at Luffy, her heart aching at the weight of his words. She couldn’t imagine watching someone make that kind of sacrifice—giving up a part of themselves to protect someone else. The thought of it was both humbling and terrifying.
“How did he stop the sea king?” Nami asked, breaking the heavy silence.
Luffy’s face lit up slightly. “He just looked at it. One look, and the sea king turned tail and swam away.”
“What?” Zoro asked, raising an eyebrow. “He scared it off with just a look?”
Luffy nodded. “Shanks wasn’t just strong—he was amazing. After that, I finally understood what it meant to be a pirate. It wasn’t about picking fights or showing off. It was about standing up for what really mattered.”

“And his arm?” Aiko asked hesitantly, her voice barely above a whisper. “Was he… okay?”
“He didn’t care,” Luffy said with a small smile. “He just laughed it off, like it was nothing. That’s the kind of person Shanks was.”
Aiko hugged her knees tighter, her mind racing. The story of Shanks’ sacrifice weighed heavily on her. She admired Luffy’s ability to tell it so calmly, as if he had long since come to terms with it. But Aiko wasn’t sure she could ever handle something like that. Just the thought of being in such a dangerous situation made her stomach twist.
“You really admired him, didn’t you?” she asked softly.
“Of course,” Luffy said, his grin returning. “He’s the best. And one day, I’m going to return this hat to him. That’s my promise.”
Aiko glanced at Luffy’s straw hat, noting the care with which he adjusted it. It wasn’t just a hat—it was a symbol of everything he stood for. She envied that sense of purpose, that unshakable resolve. She wished she could be as brave as him, even if only for a moment.

 

As Luffy’s story ended, the boat fell silent once more, the weight of his words lingering in the air. Even Zoro, who rarely showed emotion, seemed thoughtful.
“That’s quite a story,” Zoro said finally. “Sounds like Shanks made a real impression on you.”
“He did,” Luffy said firmly. “And I’m going to make him proud. I’m going to be a great pirate.”
Aiko managed a small smile. “I think he’d already be proud of you.”
Luffy’s grin widened. “Thanks, Aiko!”

Nami shook her head, a faint smile tugging at her lips. “You’re really something, Luffy. But I’ll admit… it’s kind of inspiring.”
“Well, yeah!” Luffy said, his energy returning. “We’re a crew, right? And together, we’re going to do amazing things!”
Aiko glanced at the others, her chest tightening slightly. For the first time, she felt a spark of belonging—a sense that maybe, just maybe, she had found a place where she could grow into someone stronger.

The sun had begun its slow descent, its golden light bathing the ocean in warm hues of orange and pink. The atmosphere on the small boat had lightened considerably since Luffy’s story, and the crew had settled into a quiet rhythm. Nami remained focused on her maps, her sharp mind calculating their route with meticulous precision. Zoro leaned back with his arms crossed, his expression unreadable as he gazed at the horizon. Luffy, on the other hand, was back to grinning ear-to-ear, as if Shanks’ memory had rekindled his boundless energy.

 

Aiko, still seated near the stern, watched her crewmates in silence. She was beginning to feel a little more at ease, though her nervous hands still fidgeted with the hem of her dress. Luffy’s story had left a deep impression on her. Shanks’ courage, Luffy’s resolve—it was so different from how she saw herself. But being among them, even if she didn’t feel like she belonged yet, gave her a sense of hope she couldn’t quite put into words.
Nami let out a quiet huff, drawing everyone’s attention. “Well, Captain,” she said, her tone laced with playful sarcasm, “it looks like we’re heading toward the nearest island. Hopefully, it has a decent port.”

“Great!” Luffy said, practically bouncing in place. “I can’t wait to see what’s there!”
Aiko tilted her head, curiosity overtaking her hesitation. “Do you think it’ll be another pirate town?” she asked softly.
“Does it matter?” Zoro replied, smirking. “Wherever we end up, there’s bound to be trouble.”
“Trouble doesn’t bother me,” Luffy said cheerfully. “It makes things more exciting!”
Aiko gave a small, hesitant smile. “I’m not sure I’d call it exciting…”
“Don’t worry, Aiko,” Luffy said, leaning forward and giving her a thumbs-up. “We’ve got your back.”
She nodded, her fingers brushing the hilt of her sword for reassurance. She wasn’t sure how much help she’d be in a real fight, but something about Luffy’s confidence in her made her want to try.

 

As the boat continued its journey, the conversation died down again, leaving only the gentle sound of the waves. Aiko found herself lost in thought, her gaze fixed on the horizon. The open sea, once overwhelming and terrifying, now seemed a little less daunting. The faint glow of the setting sun on the water made it look almost inviting.
“Hey, Aiko,” Nami’s voice cut through her thoughts.
Aiko blinked, turning to face the navigator. “Y-yes?”
“You’ve been pretty quiet,” Nami said, raising an eyebrow. “What’s on your mind?”
Aiko hesitated, glancing down at her hands. “I was just… thinking about everything Luffy said. About Shanks, about being brave…” She trailed off, unsure of how to put her thoughts into words.

Nami studied her for a moment before her expression softened. “It’s a lot to take in, isn’t it?”
Aiko nodded. “I just… I don’t know if I could ever be that brave. I’m not like Luffy or Zoro. I don’t think I’m meant for this kind of life.”
“None of us are like Luffy,” Nami said with a faint smirk. “But that doesn’t mean you can’t find your own way to be strong.”
Aiko looked up at her, surprised by the encouragement. “You think so?”
“Sure,” Nami said with a shrug. “You don’t have to be fearless to be strong. You just have to know what you’re fighting for.”
Aiko’s chest tightened at her words. She wasn’t sure what she was fighting for yet, but maybe that was okay. Maybe, with time, she would figure it out.

 

As the first stars began to appear in the darkening sky, the crew settled in for the night. Luffy lay sprawled out on the deck, staring up at the heavens with a dreamy smile. Zoro had taken up his usual position, sitting with his back against the mast and his swords within reach. Nami carefully folded her maps and tucked them away, while Aiko sat quietly, her legs crossed and her head resting against the side of the boat.

Despite her lingering fears, Aiko felt a flicker of warmth as she looked at her crewmates. They were an odd group, thrown together by chance, but there was something unspoken tying them together—a growing sense of trust, of shared purpose. For the first time in a long time, Aiko felt like she wasn’t entirely alone.
“Hey, Aiko,” Luffy called, breaking the silence.
She looked up, startled. “Y-yes?”
Luffy grinned at her. “You’re doing great. I’m glad you’re here.”
Her cheeks flushed, and she looked away, hiding her embarrassment. “Th-thank you, Luffy…”
His words, simple as they were, filled her with quiet determination. She still had a long way to go, but for now, she was content to take it one step at a time—one wave at a time.

 

As the stars blinked into view one by one, the boat drifted steadily onward, carrying the crew toward an unknown destination. The quiet lapping of the waves and the gentle creak of the wooden hull filled the night air. Aiko sat near the stern, hugging her knees to her chest once again. The warmth of Luffy’s earlier words lingered in her heart, but her mind refused to quiet.
She glanced around at her crewmates. Luffy had dozed off, his straw hat tilted over his face, rising and falling gently with his breaths. Zoro was still seated with his back against the mast, his swords resting by his side as he watched the stars in contemplative silence. Nami leaned against the edge of the boat, her arms crossed as she gazed at the horizon, her expression difficult to read.
Aiko hesitated, then softly spoke. “Nami?”

The navigator turned her head, her sharp eyes catching the faint moonlight. “What is it?”
“Do you… do you ever get scared?” Aiko asked, her voice barely above a whisper. She averted her gaze, embarrassed by the question but too curious to let it go.
Nami blinked, clearly surprised. “Scared?”
Aiko nodded, hugging her knees tighter. “You seem so confident all the time. But… I was wondering if you ever feel afraid. Of the sea, or what’s ahead, or… anything.”
Nami was quiet for a moment, her gaze returning to the horizon. “Of course I get scared,” she admitted, her voice calm but firm. “Anyone who says they don’t is either lying or stupid.”
Aiko looked up, surprised by the honesty in her tone.
“But I don’t let it stop me,” Nami continued. “There are things I want—things I need to do. So even when I’m scared, I keep moving forward. That’s the only way to survive out here.”

Aiko let the words sink in, her fingers curling tighter around her knees. “I don’t know if I’m as strong as you,” she said softly.
Nami glanced at her, a faint smirk tugging at the corner of her lips. “You don’t have to be as strong as me. You just have to find your own strength. Trust me, it’s there. You just haven’t seen it yet.”

 

The gentle rhythm of the boat was suddenly interrupted by a distant rumble. Aiko’s head shot up, her eyes wide as she scanned the horizon. “What was that?”
Zoro straightened, his hand instinctively moving to his swords. “Thunder,” he said simply. “Sounds like there’s a storm brewing.”
Nami frowned, standing and adjusting her grip on the boat’s tiller. “It’s coming from the east. It shouldn’t hit us directly, but we’ll need to be careful.”
“Storms are dangerous, right?” Aiko asked, her voice trembling slightly.

Nami shot her a sharp look. “They can be, but panicking won’t help. Just stay calm and follow my lead.”
Luffy stirred, pushing his hat back and rubbing his eyes. “What’s going on?”
“Storm to the east,” Zoro said, nodding toward the horizon. “Nami’s got it under control.”
“Great!” Luffy said, grinning. “Storms are fun!”
Aiko stared at him in disbelief. “H-how can you say that?”
“Because they are,” Luffy said simply. “You’ll see.”
Aiko wasn’t sure if she envied his optimism or found it infuriating. Either way, her heart continued to race as the distant flashes of lightning lit up the darkened sky.

 

As the boat rocked gently in the rising waves, Aiko forced herself to take slow, steady breaths. She could feel her fear bubbling just beneath the surface, threatening to overwhelm her, but she remembered Nami’s words: You just have to find your own strength.
The storm was far off, but the sight of it—looming, unpredictable—was enough to make her chest tighten. She glanced at Luffy, who was now standing at the bow, his grin wide and unshaken as he stared at the flashes of lightning in the distance. Zoro remained calm, his swords within easy reach, while Nami expertly adjusted the sails.

Despite her fear, Aiko felt a flicker of determination. If they could face danger so fearlessly, maybe—just maybe—she could, too.
“Is there anything I can do to help?” she asked suddenly, her voice trembling slightly but steady enough to carry over the sound of the wind.
Nami turned to her, a hint of approval in her sharp gaze. “Keep an eye on the ropes. If the wind picks up, we’ll need to secure everything.”
Aiko nodded, moving cautiously toward the nearest rope. Her hands trembled as she gripped it, but she forced herself to focus. She couldn’t let her fear control her—not now, not when the crew was counting on her.
Luffy glanced back at her and grinned. “See? I told you storms are fun!”
Aiko managed a faint, shaky smile. She wasn’t sure she’d call this fun, but for the first time, she felt like she was part of the crew—like she belonged.

 

The storm, as Nami predicted, stayed to the east, its rumbling thunder fading into the distance as the night wore on. The waves calmed once more, and the stars reappeared, their soft glow reflecting on the water. Aiko let out a quiet sigh of relief, her hands still gripping the rope as she sank back into her seat.
“You did good,” Nami said, her tone surprisingly gentle. “See? Nothing to be afraid of.”
Aiko nodded, though her heart was still racing. “Thank you, Nami.”

Luffy plopped down beside her, his hat askew and his grin as wide as ever. “You’re braver than you think, Aiko.”
Her cheeks flushed, and she looked away, embarrassed but grateful. “Th-thank you…”
Zoro, leaning back against the mast once more, chuckled softly. “You’ll get used to this life sooner or later.”
Aiko glanced around at the crew—at Luffy’s boundless energy, Nami’s steady confidence, and Zoro’s calm strength—and felt a warmth she hadn’t expected. She wasn’t sure what lay ahead, but for the first time, she wasn’t afraid to find out.
The boat sailed on, carrying them toward new adventures. And though Aiko’s fears still lingered, so did the quiet spark of hope that she was beginning to find her place among them.

 

As the night deepened, the stars scattered across the heavens like a thousand tiny lanterns, reflecting softly on the calm waves. The crew had grown quiet once more after the storm faded into the distance, and a comfortable stillness settled over the small boat. Luffy remained seated at the bow, his straw hat tilted back as he gazed at the horizon with a dreamy smile, his thoughts still lingering on Shanks and the promise he had made.
Nami leaned against the boat's side, her arms crossed as she stared out at the sea. She’d heard many stories from pirates in her time, but Luffy’s story had struck a chord. Despite his goofy demeanor, there was a depth to him that caught her off guard.

Zoro, ever calm and stoic, leaned back against the mast with his swords resting nearby, seemingly lost in thought. He had been quiet since Luffy finished his story, but his gaze occasionally flickered toward their captain, a faint trace of respect in his expression.
Aiko sat with her knees drawn to her chest, her hands gripping her sword tightly. She had been unusually quiet since the storm had passed, her thoughts swirling with everything she had learned that day. Luffy’s story of Shanks’ sacrifice lingered in her mind. She couldn’t stop picturing that moment—a man willing to give up his arm to save someone else. The courage, the selflessness—it was so far removed from anything she thought herself capable of.

As if sensing her turmoil, Luffy suddenly turned to her, his grin as bright as ever. “Aiko,” he said, his tone cheerful but genuine. “You’re going to be okay.”
Aiko blinked, startled by his words. “W-what?”
“You’re thinking too much again,” Luffy said, leaning forward slightly. “You’re stronger than you think. You’ll see.”
Her cheeks flushed, and she looked away, unsure how to respond. “I… I don’t know,” she murmured.
“You don’t have to know yet,” Luffy said simply. “That’s what adventures are for. You’ll figure it out.”
Nami glanced over, a faint smile tugging at her lips. “Luffy’s right,” she said, surprising Aiko. “It’s not about knowing everything right away. Sometimes, you just have to keep moving forward and trust that you’ll find your way.”
Aiko hesitated, her fingers brushing the hilt of her sword. “Keep moving forward,” she repeated softly. The words felt heavy, but not in a bad way. Slowly, she nodded. “Okay.”

 

As the first light of dawn broke over the horizon, painting the sky in hues of gold and pink, the crew stirred to life. Nami adjusted the sails, her sharp eyes scanning the distant shore that had come into view. Zoro stretched, his movements languid and deliberate, while Luffy immediately stood up, his energy as boundless as ever.
“Land!” Luffy shouted, pointing toward the approaching island. “Let’s see what’s there!”

Aiko sat up straighter, her heart racing with both excitement and trepidation. She wasn’t sure what awaited them on this new island, but she was beginning to understand that she didn’t have to face it alone. For the first time, she felt a small flicker of anticipation—an eagerness to see what lay ahead.
As the boat drew closer to the island, Luffy turned to his crew, his grin impossibly wide. “This is just the beginning,” he said, his voice brimming with excitement. “We’re going to have so many adventures together!”

Aiko couldn’t help but smile, a small but genuine expression that surprised even herself. “I guess… I’m ready.”
And with that, the crew sailed onward, their bond growing stronger with each passing moment and the promise of adventure lighting their way.

Chapter 4: Shadows Over Syrup Village

Summary:

“If I fail… at least I tried.”

Notes:

The Next Chapter will come next Week.
:)

Chapter Text

The small boat rocked gently as it neared the shores of Syrup Village, its wooden hull skimming over the calm, clear waters. Aiko sat toward the back of the boat, her long pink hair fluttering in the breeze as she stared at the approaching coastline. The rolling green hills and quaint houses of the village came into view, bathed in the soft morning light. Her white dress contrasted with the rugged appearance of her crewmates, and though she gripped the hilt of her sword tightly, her posture betrayed her nervousness.
“I hope they have meat,” Luffy said from his usual spot at the front of the boat, his straw hat tilted back as he squinted at the village. His voice was cheerful and loud, as always.

Nami groaned. “We’re here to find supplies, not eat the whole village.”
Zoro stretched, his swords clinking softly as they shifted at his side. “It’s quiet. Too quiet.”
Aiko glanced at Zoro, her heart racing slightly at the thought of what might lie ahead. The peaceful village didn’t seem dangerous, but in her experience, appearances could be deceiving. She adjusted the hem of her dress and tried to steady her breathing, unsure of how she fit into this crew’s world of endless confidence and adventure.

The boat landed softly on the shore, and Luffy jumped out immediately, his enthusiasm as boundless as ever. “Let’s go explore!” he shouted, already running ahead.
“Luffy!” Nami called after him, exasperated. She stepped off the boat, shaking her head. “At least try to stay focused.”
Zoro followed, his steps unhurried as he surveyed the surroundings. Aiko hesitated for a moment before stepping onto the sand. The weight of her sword felt heavy at her side, but she pressed forward, determined not to lag too far behind.

 

As the crew made their way into the village, the sound of birds chirping and the rustling of leaves filled the air. Syrup Village seemed serene, its cobblestone paths winding between neat houses with colorful rooftops. Aiko trailed behind the others, her wide eyes taking in the sights. The tranquility of the village was almost too perfect, and she couldn’t shake the sense that something was lurking beneath the surface.
Suddenly, a loud and panicked voice shattered the peace. “Pirates are coming! Pirates are attacking the village!” The shout echoed across the hills, startling a flock of birds into flight.

The crew stopped in their tracks, turning toward the source of the commotion. Aiko instinctively reached for her sword, her fingers trembling slightly as she scanned the horizon.
Charging down a grassy hill was a lanky young man with a long nose, his arms flailing wildly. His exaggerated movements and frantic shouts painted a comical picture, though his voice carried urgency.
“Who’s that guy?” Luffy asked, tilting his head in curiosity.
“Not sure,” Nami replied, narrowing her eyes at the spectacle.
The young man skidded to a stop in front of them, panting heavily as he placed his hands on his knees. Straightening up, he struck a dramatic pose, pointing at the crew. “Who are you people? Pirates, aren’t you? Admit it!”
Luffy grinned. “Yeah, we’re pirates! Who are you?”
“I am Captain Usopp!” the man declared, puffing out his chest. “Brave warrior of the sea, leader of 8,000 men, and protector of this village!”
“8,000 men?” Nami repeated, unimpressed. “Where are they?”
“They’re… they’re on patrol!” Usopp said, waving his hand dismissively. “Scouring the seas for danger, of course.”
Zoro chuckled softly, clearly unbothered by Usopp’s antics. Aiko, however, stayed quiet, her pink hair partially obscuring her face as she observed the strange man from behind Nami. Usopp’s bold claims and exaggerated gestures made her feel small in comparison. She tugged nervously at the hem of her dress, wishing she could shrink into the background.

“And who’s this?” Usopp said suddenly, pointing at Aiko. “She looks mysterious! Is she part of your crew?”
Aiko flinched, her cheeks flushing as all eyes turned to her. “I-I’m just traveling with them,” she stammered, her voice barely audible.
“She’s strong!” Luffy declared, grinning widely. “She just doesn’t know it yet.”
“Ah,” Usopp said, nodding knowingly. “A quiet swordswoman hiding her true power. I like it!”
Aiko glanced at Luffy, startled by his confidence in her. She offered a small, shy smile but quickly looked away, her fingers brushing against her sword. She wasn’t sure she believed his words, but something about Luffy’s unwavering cheerfulness made her feel just a little braver.

 

Usopp’s chest swelled with pride as he held his dramatic pose, basking in the attention of the group. “So,” he said, his tone shifting to one of authority, “you pirates better watch yourselves. As the leader of 8,000 men, I’ve dealt with countless threats before!”
Luffy tilted his head, grinning even wider. “You said your name is Usopp, right? Do you know a guy named Yasopp?”
Usopp froze mid-gesture, his confidence faltering for the briefest moment. “Y-Yasopp? How do you know that name?” he asked, his voice softer now, tinged with curiosity and suspicion.
“Because I met him!” Luffy exclaimed, his grin stretching ear to ear. “He’s part of Shanks’ crew—the Red-Haired Pirates. He told me all about his son back when I was a kid!”

Usopp’s bravado faded as genuine emotion flickered in his eyes. “You… you met my dad?”
Luffy nodded. “He said he missed you! Every time he talked about you, he had the biggest smile. He said you’d grow up to be a great man, just like him.”
Usopp quickly turned his back to the group, rubbing his face with his sleeve. “Well, of course he’d say that!” he said, his voice cracking slightly.
Aiko watched in silence, her heart aching for Usopp. She offered him a small, shy smile. “I think… he’d be proud of you.”
Usopp blinked, caught off guard, before quickly turning away. “Of course he would!” he declared dramatically.
Luffy clapped a hand on his shoulder. “You’re awesome, Usopp! Let’s team up!”
As the group continued toward the center of the village, Aiko found herself walking beside Usopp, feeling a quiet connection with him—a kindred spirit hiding behind a mask.

 

“So,” Usopp said suddenly, his voice softer now. “What’s your deal? You don’t talk much, but you seem… different from the rest of these guys.”
Aiko hesitated, her fingers brushing against the fabric of her dress. “I… I don’t really know,” she admitted. “I’m still figuring things out.”
Usopp nodded thoughtfully. “Yeah, I get that. Sometimes you don’t know where you fit in until you try a bunch of different things.”
Aiko glanced at him, surprised by the wisdom in his words. “Maybe,” she said quietly, her lips curving into a faint smile. “Thanks.”
“Don’t mention it,” Usopp replied, his grin returning. “Just stick with Captain Usopp—I’ll make sure you find your place!”
As the group laughed and bantered, Aiko felt a small flicker of hope growing within her. Maybe this strange crew and their new ally could help her discover the strength she had been searching for.

 

As the group wandered further into Syrup Village, the lively chatter between Usopp and Luffy filled the air. Usopp had quickly regained his dramatic flair, telling Luffy about his grand "adventures" and numerous "victories" as the brave warrior of the sea. Luffy listened with rapt attention, laughing at every exaggerated detail. Aiko, however, walked silently beside Nami, occasionally glancing back at Usopp and Luffy.
“So,” Nami said, nudging Aiko gently, “what do you think about that guy? Captain of 8,000 men, huh?”
Aiko hesitated, unsure how to respond. “He… seems nice,” she said softly. “And... funny. But I think he’s hiding how he really feels.”
Nami raised an eyebrow, impressed by Aiko’s insight. “Not bad. You caught on quickly.”

“I just… recognize it,” Aiko admitted, her voice barely audible. “Sometimes, it’s easier to pretend you’re strong than to admit you’re scared.”
Nami glanced at her, her sharp gaze softening slightly. “Yeah, well, people like that usually have more going on than they let on.”
Meanwhile, Luffy slapped Usopp on the back, grinning from ear to ear. “You and your dad both love stories, huh? I bet you’d get along great with Shanks!”
“Shanks?” Usopp asked, blinking. “The pirate captain my dad works for?”
“Yeah! Shanks is amazing!” Luffy said, throwing his arms wide. “When I was a kid, he and his crew stayed in my village for a while. That’s when I met Yasopp. Shanks always had the best stories—he’s the reason I decided to become a pirate!”
Usopp’s expression softened, a rare flicker of vulnerability crossing his face. “My dad… used to tell me stories too,” he said quietly. “But then he left to be a pirate, and I guess he never came back.”

Aiko looked at Usopp, her heart aching at the sadness in his voice. She wanted to say something, to reassure him, but the words felt stuck in her throat. Instead, she tightened her grip on the hilt of her sword, a gesture that gave her a small sense of control.
“He’s out there living his dream,” Luffy said, his tone surprisingly serious. “Just like you and me. But I know he thinks about you all the time.”
Usopp’s usual bravado seemed to falter again, but he quickly recovered, striking a pose. “Well, of course he does! I’m Captain Usopp, after all! The bravest warrior in the East Blue!”

 

As the group approached a clearing, the grand mansion on the hill came into view. Usopp stopped suddenly, his confident smile fading as he spotted a familiar figure near the gates. Klahadore, Kaya’s butler, stood tall and imposing, his sharp glasses gleaming in the sunlight. His posture was rigid, his expression unreadable as he watched the group approach.
Usopp gritted his teeth, his fists clenching at his sides. “That guy… he’s always trying to keep me away from Kaya. Acting like he knows what’s best for her.”
“Who’s that?” Zoro asked, his hand resting casually on the hilt of his sword.
“Klahadore,” Usopp replied, his tone laced with frustration. “He’s Kaya’s butler. Always so uptight and bossy. He acts like I’m a nuisance just because I like to visit her!”

Klahadore’s cold gaze swept over the group as they came closer. His expression hardened when his eyes landed on Usopp. “You again,” he said, his voice sharp and condescending. “Must you always loiter around this property? Miss Kaya has no need for your disruptions.”
“I’m not a disruption!” Usopp shot back, stepping forward. “I’m her friend! I’m here to check on her!”
“Miss Kaya is resting,” Klahadore replied curtly. “She does not require your… antics. And these strangers—” His sharp eyes flicked toward the crew, lingering momentarily on Aiko. “They are not welcome here.”

Aiko shrank slightly under his gaze, her hands clenching the fabric of her dress. There was something unsettling about Klahadore—his calm demeanor felt like a mask, hiding something far more sinister. She glanced at Nami, hoping for reassurance, but the navigator's wary expression only confirmed her own unease.
“Klahadore,” Luffy said, stepping forward, his tone casual but firm. “Why are you so uptight? We’re not here to cause trouble. We just want to meet Kaya.”
“You dare address me so informally?” Klahadore said, adjusting his glasses with a deliberate motion. “As I said, Miss Kaya is resting. If you have no business here, I suggest you leave.”
Zoro smirked, clearly unimpressed by the butler’s attitude. “You’re awfully protective for a butler. What’s your deal?”
Klahadore’s expression didn’t waver. “My ‘deal,’ as you so crudely put it, is ensuring Miss Kaya’s safety and well-being. Now, if you’ll excuse me, I have no further time to waste on this nonsense.” With that, he turned and walked back toward the mansion, his polished shoes clicking against the stone path.

 

As Klahadore disappeared behind the gates, Usopp let out a frustrated sigh. “See what I mean? That guy acts like he owns Kaya’s life. He doesn’t care about her—he just wants to control her!”
Nami crossed her arms, her sharp eyes narrowing as she stared after Klahadore. “There’s definitely something off about him. He’s too… perfect.”
Zoro nodded in agreement. “People like that usually have something to hide.”
Aiko hesitated before speaking, her voice quiet. “He… he scares me,” she admitted, her fingers brushing against the hilt of her sword. “When he looked at me, it felt like… he saw through me.”
Usopp turned to her, surprised. “You felt that too?”

She nodded, her pink hair falling across her face. “I don’t know why, but… something about him isn’t right.”
“Then let’s figure it out,” Luffy said, his usual grin returning. “If Klahadore’s hiding something, we’ll find out what it is!”
Usopp’s eyes widened, and he pointed at Luffy dramatically. “You’re not saying… you want to help me, are you?”
“Of course!” Luffy replied, laughing. “It’ll be fun!”
As the group began to devise a plan, Aiko felt a flicker of courage stirring within her. For the first time in a long while, she wasn’t just an observer—she was part of something bigger. She didn’t know what secrets Syrup Village held, but she was ready to face them alongside the Straw Hat crew.

 

The crew followed him, Aiko trailing behind with her sword clutched tightly in her hands. Her heart raced as they reached the gathering crowd by the shore. Anchored near the beach was a ship with tattered black sails. Its dark, ominous Jolly Roger—a skull with crossbones and cat-like ears—fluttered in the breeze, leaving no doubt about its origins.
Usopp froze in his tracks, his face pale as he stared at the ship. “That flag…” he muttered, his voice barely audible. “That’s the Black Cat Pirates.”
“Looks like your suspicions were right,” Nami said, her tone tense.
“That means Klahadore really is Captain Kuro,” Zoro added, his voice calm but sharp. “This isn’t just some small-time crew—these guys have a reputation.”
Aiko’s grip on her sword tightened as she stared at the ship. Fear coursed through her veins, but she swallowed hard and tried to steady herself. The villagers around them panicked, their fearful cries filling the air.

“What are we going to do?” one of the villagers shouted. “Those pirates will destroy everything!”
“We have to evacuate the village!” another cried.
Luffy stepped forward, his grin as confident as ever. “We’ll take care of them,” he said, cracking his knuckles. “They messed with the wrong village.”
Usopp turned to Luffy, his face a mix of fear and determination. “You really think we can stop them? These aren’t just ordinary pirates—they’re dangerous!”
“Dangerous or not, we’re not going to let them hurt anyone,” Luffy replied firmly. “We’ll stop them together.”
Zoro smirked. “Sounds like a good fight. Let’s see what they’ve got.”

Nami sighed but nodded. “It’s not like we can ignore this. If Klahadore—no, Kuro—is behind this, then there’s more at stake than just the village.”
Aiko hesitated, her hands trembling slightly. She wasn’t sure if she was ready to face something so terrifying, but as she looked at Luffy’s unwavering confidence and the determination in Usopp’s eyes, she felt a spark of courage flicker within her. Taking a deep breath, she stepped forward. “I’ll help,” she said quietly.
Usopp looked at her in surprise, a hint of gratitude in his expression. “Really?”
She nodded, gripping her sword tightly. “If we work together, maybe we can stop them.”

 

As the crew prepared for the confrontation, Usopp began setting traps around the village—a skill he had honed during years of mischief and storytelling. Zoro sharpened his swords with calm precision, while Nami helped organize the villagers and secure their valuables. Luffy, as usual, radiated confidence, cracking jokes to lighten the mood.
Aiko stayed close to Usopp, watching as he worked tirelessly to set up tripwires and other improvised defenses. “You’re good at this,” she said softly.
Usopp glanced at her, surprised by the compliment. “Well, when you spend your whole life telling stories, you get pretty good at thinking on your feet.”
“You’re more than just a storyteller,” Aiko said, a shy smile breaking through. “You’re brave.”

Usopp blushed slightly, scratching the back of his head. “W-well, thanks. But let’s see how brave I really am when those pirates show up.”
Aiko nodded, her own doubts creeping back into her mind. But as she watched the crew working together, she felt a small glimmer of hope. They weren’t just a group of strangers anymore—they were becoming a team.

 

The sun hung low in the sky, casting long shadows over the hills of Syrup Village. The Straw Hat crew, alongside Usopp, had worked together to prepare for the arrival of the Black Cat Pirates. Usopp’s traps were meticulously hidden across the village, designed to slow down any invaders, while Nami ensured the villagers’ safety by guiding them to a hidden area.
“We’ve got everything in place,” Usopp said, adjusting his slingshot as he surveyed the surroundings. “All we need now is to stick together and—hey, wait! Where are Luffy and Zoro?!”
Aiko’s heart sank as she looked around. Sure enough, their fearless captain and stoic swordsman were nowhere to be seen. She instinctively placed a hand on the hilt of her sword, her anxiety building. “They were right behind us,” she said softly, glancing at Nami.
Nami groaned, pinching the bridge of her nose. “I told them to follow me! How do you lose your way in such a small village?!”
“Luffy probably got distracted by something stupid, and Zoro… well, he could get lost walking in a straight line,” Usopp muttered, shaking his head. “Great! Just great!”

Aiko hesitated. “What… what do we do without them?” she asked, her voice trembling slightly.
“We don’t have time to look for them,” Nami replied firmly, her sharp eyes scanning the horizon. “The Black Cat Pirates are almost here. We’ll just have to handle this ourselves.”
Usopp’s confidence wavered as he stared down at his slingshot. “Ourselves? Against Kuro’s crew? You’re joking, right?”
“You’re the brave warrior of the sea, remember?” Nami snapped. “This is your chance to prove it.”
Aiko clenched her fists, her grip tightening on the hilt of her sword. Fear gnawed at the edges of her mind, but she pushed it aside. “We can do this,” she said quietly, more to herself than to anyone else.

 

The sound of heavy boots against the cobblestone path echoed in the distance. The Black Cat Pirates emerged from the shadows, their menacing presence sending a chill through the air. Their scruffy, mismatched clothing and sinister grins made it clear that these were no ordinary raiders.
Leading the group was Jango, the hypnotist and second-in-command of the Black Cat Pirates. His round glasses and strange outfit only added to his unsettling aura. He twirled his hypnotic ring on one finger, his movements oddly graceful. “Well, well,” Jango said, his voice smooth and mocking. “Looks like we’ve got some brave little villagers ready to fight.”
“We’re not villagers,” Nami said coldly, stepping forward with a fierce glare. “We’re pirates. And we’re not about to let you lay a finger on this village.”
Jango raised an eyebrow, clearly amused. “Pirates, huh? What are a couple of amateurs and a scrawny kid gonna do against us?”
Usopp bristled at the insult, his fists clenching. “Hey! I’m not scrawny! And I’m not scared of you!”
Jango chuckled. “Big talk for someone with no backup.”

Aiko stood beside Usopp, her sword trembling slightly in her hand. She felt the weight of the situation pressing down on her, but she refused to back down. “Leave this village alone,” she said, her voice quiet but steady.
“And who’s this?” Jango said, turning his attention to her. “A swordswoman, huh? You don’t look like much. What’s the matter? Scared?”
Aiko’s cheeks flushed, but she didn’t look away. Despite her fear, she tightened her grip on her sword and stood her ground. “I’m not scared,” she said firmly.
Nami stepped closer to Aiko and Usopp, her gaze unwavering. “Listen, you clowns. If you know what’s good for you, you’ll turn around and leave. Because if you don’t, you’ll regret it.”
Jango’s grin widened as he gestured to his crew. “Let’s see what these so-called pirates are made of. Go get them, boys.”

 

Jango, still observing the chaos from a higher vantage point, twirled his hypnotic ring lazily. “What a pitiful little group,” he remarked, his tone dripping with mockery. “This isn’t even a real fight.”
Turning to his crew, he raised his voice. “Finish them off quickly. I have more important things to do than waste time on amateurs.”

 

As the next wave of pirates charged forward, Jango leaped down from his perch, landing gracefully amidst the fray. He twirled his ring in front of him, the silver disk catching the fading sunlight. “Let me show you how it’s done,” he said with a smirk.
Nami's eyes narrowed as she watched Jango approach. “Be careful!” she warned Aiko and Usopp. “That guy’s a hypnotist. Don’t look at his ring!”
“A hypnotist?!” Usopp exclaimed, ducking behind a tree to avoid a swinging blade. “That’s cheating!”

Jango twirled his ring faster, its hypnotic gleam intensifying. “Look into my eyes and fall under my spell,” he said in a sing-song voice.
Aiko clenched her jaw, averting her gaze as she gripped her sword tighter. Her body trembled with adrenaline, but she forced herself to focus. “Don’t look,” she murmured to herself, repeating Nami’s warning like a mantra.

Nami, ever resourceful, grabbed a small pouch of sand from her satchel. As Jango drew closer, she hurled the sand in his direction, aiming for his eyes. “Take that!”
Jango stumbled backward, coughing and rubbing his face as the sand disrupted his concentration. “You little—! You’ll pay for that!”
“Now’s our chance!” Nami shouted. “Aiko, Usopp—go for it!”

 

Gathering her courage, Aiko charged forward, her sword raised. She swung with all her strength, clashing with one of Jango’s crewmates who stepped in to block her path. The impact of the swords rattled her arms, but she gritted her teeth and held her ground.
Usopp, meanwhile, fired another shot from his slingshot, aiming for Jango. The projectile grazed the hypnotist’s shoulder, causing him to stumble slightly. “Ha! Got him!” Usopp cheered, though his victory was short-lived as two pirates closed in on him. Scrambling backward, he tripped over one of his own traps, narrowly avoiding a downward slash.

“Aiko, keep them off me!” Usopp yelled as he scrambled to his feet.
“I’m trying!” Aiko replied, her voice shaking as she deflected another attack. Her movements were clumsy and uncertain, but her determination shone through. She thought of Luffy’s unwavering confidence and used it to steady her resolve. If he believed in her, she couldn’t let him down.
Nami, using her quick reflexes, managed to trip another pirate and send him tumbling into one of Usopp’s traps. “Where are Luffy and Zoro?” she muttered under her breath, frustration evident in her tone.

 

Just as the trio began to falter under the sheer number of enemies, a familiar voice rang out from the distance. “Gomu Gomu no… Rocket!”
A sudden blur shot through the air, crashing into the center of the Black Cat Pirates and sending several of them flying. Luffy landed in the middle of the fray, his signature grin plastered across his face. “Sorry we’re late!” he shouted.
Zoro appeared moments later, his swords gleaming as he joined the fight. “You guys couldn’t wait two minutes?” he said dryly, effortlessly cutting down an incoming attacker.

Relief washed over Aiko, Nami, and Usopp as their missing crewmates finally arrived. “Took you long enough!” Nami yelled, her voice a mix of anger and relief.
“We got lost,” Luffy said with a laugh, completely unfazed.
“Of course you did,” Usopp muttered, shaking his head.
With the full crew reunited, the tide of battle began to shift. Luffy’s rubber abilities and Zoro’s unmatched swordsmanship made quick work of the remaining pirates. Aiko stepped back, her arms trembling as she lowered her sword. Though she was exhausted, she felt a sense of pride—she had held her ground.

“You did great,” Nami said to Aiko, placing a reassuring hand on her shoulder. Aiko offered a small, grateful smile in response.
As the last of the Black Cat Pirates retreated, the group regrouped, their determination stronger than ever. The fight wasn’t over yet—Kuro was still out there, and they knew he wouldn’t go down without a fight.

 

With the arrival of Captain Kuro, the tension in the air grew palpable. The villagers were blissfully unaware of the chaos unfolding on the outskirts of the village, still carrying on with their daily lives, oblivious to the threat lurking nearby. For the Straw Hat crew, Usopp, and Aiko, there was no room for hesitation. The fight for Syrup Village had truly begun.

Kuro stood with an air of deadly calm, his sharp, clawed gloves glinting menacingly in the dimming light. He adjusted his glasses with deliberate precision, his movements eerily quiet as his eyes scanned the battlefield. Behind him, the remnants of the Black Cat Pirates regrouped, emboldened by their captain’s presence.
“Do you understand how much effort it took to craft this perfect plan?” Kuro said, his cold voice slicing through the tension. “Years of meticulous preparation—throwing away my identity, faking my death, and enduring life as a mere servant. And now, you amateurs dare to interfere?”

“I’ll do more than interfere!” Usopp shouted, his hands trembling as he aimed his slingshot directly at Kuro. “I’ll protect Kaya from scum like you, no matter what!”
Kuro raised an eyebrow, his lips curving into a faint, mocking smile. “How noble of you, liar. Tell me, do you really think your little tricks will make a difference?”
“I’m not just a liar!” Usopp yelled, firing a shot that Kuro dodged effortlessly. “I’m the captain of the great Usopp Pirates, and I won’t let you get away with this!”
The battle against Kuro had begun, and the Straw Hat crew was ready to fight with everything they had.

Meanwhile, Luffy bounced back from another attack, his grin growing wider. “Your plan might’ve worked if we weren’t here, but you messed up when you tried to hurt Kaya. Now it’s over for you!”
Kuro’s lips curled into a sinister smile. “You think you’ve won just because you’re putting up a fight? Let’s see how long you last.”

 

As the battle raged on, Usopp couldn’t shake the feeling that there was more he could do. He glanced at Nami and Aiko, both of whom were keeping a close eye on the fight. His chest tightened as he thought of Kaya, still unaware of the danger she was in. He had to protect her—no matter what.
Gripping his slingshot tightly, Usopp turned to Nami and Aiko. “I’m going to the mansion,” he said suddenly, his voice laced with determination.
“What?!” Nami exclaimed, her eyes widening. “Are you crazy? You’ll get yourself killed!”

“Kaya doesn’t know what’s happening,” Usopp replied, his gaze steady. “I have to warn her. If Kuro gets past Luffy and Zoro, she’ll be defenseless.”
Aiko hesitated, torn between fear and the urge to help. Finally, she stepped forward. “I’ll go with you,” she said softly, her voice trembling but firm.
Nami stared at them, her frustration evident. “Fine, but don’t do anything reckless. If you see Kuro heading for the mansion, run. Got it?”
Usopp nodded, a faint smile crossing his face. “Got it.”

 

Usopp and Aiko sprinted toward the mansion, the sounds of the battle growing fainter behind them. Aiko’s legs burned with each step, but she refused to slow down. She couldn’t let her fear hold her back—not when so much was at stake.
When they reached the mansion, they found Kaya sitting in the garden, her delicate figure silhouetted against the twilight sky. She looked up in surprise as Usopp and Aiko approached, her expression shifting from confusion to concern.

“Usopp? What’s going on?” Kaya asked, standing up.
“Kaya!” Usopp gasped, struggling to catch his breath. “You’re in danger! Klahadore—no, Kuro—isn’t who you think he is. He’s a pirate, and he’s been planning to steal everything from you!”
Kaya’s eyes widened, disbelief written across her face. “That’s not true,” she said shakily. “Klahadore has been nothing but loyal to me. He saved my life!”
“It was all an act!” Usopp insisted, his voice desperate. “He’s been lying to you this whole time. You have to trust me!”

Aiko stepped forward, her voice soft but steady. “It’s true. We’ve seen it ourselves. Please, you have to believe us.”
Kaya hesitated, her hands trembling as she clutched the fabric of her dress. “I… I don’t know what to believe.”
Before they could say more, a shadow fell over the garden. Kuro had arrived.

 

Kuro stepped into the garden, his claws glinting in the dim light. His calm demeanor was gone, replaced by a cold fury. “So, you’ve finally decided to interfere directly,” he said, his voice dripping with venom. “How predictable.”
Usopp stepped in front of Kaya, his slingshot raised despite the fear etched across his face. “I won’t let you hurt her!” he shouted.
Aiko stood beside him, her sword trembling in her hands but her resolve unwavering. “Neither will I,” she said firmly.

Kuro’s eyes narrowed as he took a step closer. “You’re both fools. Do you really think you can stop me?”
As the confrontation reached its peak, the sound of footsteps echoed through the garden. Luffy and Zoro had arrived, their expressions determined as they prepared for the final battle.
“It’s over, Kuro,” Luffy said, his grin replaced by a look of uncharacteristic seriousness. “We’re not letting you get away with this.”

 

With Kuro standing ominously in the garden, his claws gleaming in the faint light of dusk, the tension between him and the Straw Hat crew reached its breaking point. Aiko, Usopp, and Kaya stood side by side, their expressions a mix of fear and determination. Luffy and Zoro stepped forward to join them, their presence instilling confidence in their allies.

“You should’ve stayed down,” Kuro muttered, his voice sharp and dripping with malice. “I’ve wasted enough time with you already.”
Kaya, still stunned by the revelation of Klahadore's true identity, clutched her chest, her breaths shallow. “This can’t be real,” she whispered. “All these years… you were lying to me?”
Kuro didn’t even spare her a glance, his icy tone unwavering. “Miss Kaya, your trust was nothing but a tool—a means to an end. This has always been about the fortune. Your naive faith in me made it all the easier.”

Usopp took a protective step in front of Kaya, his hands trembling as he raised his slingshot. “You’re not taking anything from her!” he shouted, his voice cracking slightly but filled with resolve. “She’s not just some prize for you to steal!”
Luffy stepped forward, his gaze fixed on Kuro. “You talk too much,” he said simply, his tone unusually serious. “If you think you’re gonna hurt Kaya or anyone else, you’ve got another thing coming.”

Kuro adjusted his glasses, his movements slow and deliberate. “You’re just children playing at being pirates,” he sneered. “You have no idea what true power is.”
“Then show us,” Zoro challenged, his swords gleaming as he assumed his fighting stance. “Let’s see if your claws are as sharp as your words.”

 

As the fight began, Aiko stood frozen, her sword trembling in her hands. The scene before her was chaotic—Luffy charging at Kuro with reckless abandon, Zoro countering the pirate captain’s rapid movements with calculated strikes, and Usopp firing his slingshot to distract Kuro whenever possible. But despite their efforts, Kuro’s speed and precision kept him one step ahead.

“Aiko!” Nami’s urgent voice snapped her out of her thoughts. “We need to help Usopp and Kaya! Stay close to them and be ready to jump in if Kuro gets too close!”
Aiko nodded shakily, moving to stand beside Usopp and Kaya. Her heart raced as she gripped the hilt of her sword tightly. She felt like a burden—too weak and inexperienced to contribute meaningfully. But as she watched her crewmates fight with unwavering determination, a small voice in the back of her mind urged her to keep going.

 

The battle reached its climax as Luffy prepared his finishing move. He planted his feet firmly on the ground, his arms stretching back impossibly far. “Gomu Gomu no… Bell!” he shouted, his head snapping forward like a cannonball.
The force of the attack sent Kuro flying backward, his claws scraping against the ground as he struggled to stay upright. Blood dripped from his mouth as he glared at Luffy, his composure finally breaking. “You… insolent brat,” he growled.

“You’re done,” Luffy said simply, his gaze unwavering. “Get out of this village and never come back.”
Kuro staggered to his feet, his expression a mixture of fury and defeat. Realizing he had no chance of winning, he turned and fled, disappearing into the shadows.
As the dust settled, the Straw Hat crew regrouped, their exhaustion evident but their spirits high. Kaya stepped forward and smiled warmly, stepping closer to take his hand. “Thank you, Usopp. You’re not just a storyteller—you’re my hero.”

Usopp’s cheeks flushed a deep red, and for a moment, he was speechless. Aiko and Nami watched the scene unfold from a few steps away, their expressions a mix of relief and contentment. Aiko, though exhausted, felt a sense of pride knowing she had stood beside her friends and contributed to their victory.

 

The following morning, as the first light of dawn broke across the horizon, the crew gathered outside Kaya’s mansion. Despite the destruction caused by the battle, the air felt lighter, as though a weight had been lifted from the village. Kaya and her loyal servant, Merry, stood before the crew, gratitude evident in their expressions.

“I owe you all so much,” Kaya began, her voice steady but emotional. “You saved not only my life but my future. I can never thank you enough.”
Merry stepped forward with a proud smile. “Miss Kaya has instructed me to offer you this as a token of her gratitude.” He gestured toward the large ship docked nearby—a sturdy and elegant vessel, seemingly ready for adventure.
Luffy’s eyes sparkled with excitement. “A ship? For us?”

“Yes,” Kaya confirmed, nodding. “I want you to have it. It’s the least I can do after everything you’ve done for me.”
Nami’s eyes gleamed as she inspected the ship from a distance. “A proper ship will make things much easier for us,” she said, her tone practical yet excited.
Usopp hesitated, his expression conflicted. He had always dreamed of traveling the seas as a brave warrior, but leaving Kaya and his village behind felt like an impossible decision. Sensing his turmoil, Kaya stepped forward and placed a gentle hand on his arm.

“Usopp,” she said softly, “you’ve always dreamed of being a great pirate. This is your chance. You belong with them.”
Tears welled up in Usopp’s eyes, but he nodded, his resolve solidifying. “I’ll make you proud,” he promised. “When I come back, I’ll have the greatest stories to tell you.”

 

As the crew prepared to set sail, Aiko stood at the edge of the dock, staring at the horizon. The past few days had tested her in ways she had never imagined, but she felt stronger for it. She wasn’t sure what lay ahead, but she knew that with the Straw Hat crew, she had found her place.
Luffy called out to the group, his voice full of energy. “Alright, everyone! Let’s go find the One Piece!”
Nami smiled, shaking her head. “You never stop, do you?”

Zoro smirked, adjusting his swords. “It’s going to be a wild ride.”
Usopp stood tall, holding his slingshot proudly. “The great Usopp is ready for anything!”
Aiko hesitated for a moment, then stepped forward to join them. Her pink hair caught the morning light as she turned to face Luffy. “Thank you,” she said softly. “For believing in me.”

Luffy grinned, his straw hat casting a shadow over his face. “You’re part of the crew now, Aiko. Let’s make some memories.”
With that, the Straw Hat crew—now complete with their newest nakama—set sail on their new ship, ready to face whatever adventures awaited them.

Chapter 5: Shadows Over The Baratie

Summary:

“Even if I fall behind… I still want to walk with them.”

Notes:

The next chapter will come next week.
I hope you like the story so far :D
I will also post soon another Art of Aiko on Pinterest and will also put the Link here.
See you next week.

Chapter Text

The Going Merry cut gracefully through the waters of the East Blue, its goat-head figurehead standing proudly at the bow. The sea stretched endlessly in every direction, the gentle sound of waves filling the air as the Straw Hat crew embarked on their maiden voyage aboard the ship. For the crew, this moment marked a new chapter—a transition from a collection of misfit dreamers to a proper pirate crew with a vessel they could call home.
Luffy, as always, was filled with boundless enthusiasm. He had climbed to the very top of the ship’s mast, dangling precariously from the crow’s nest as he surveyed the open sea.

“This is amazing!” he shouted, his straw hat flapping in the wind. “With this ship, we’re going to find the One Piece for sure!”
“Get down from there before you fall!” Nami yelled from the helm, her voice tinged with both annoyance and concern. She had taken charge of steering the ship, her navigational skills ensuring they stayed on course.

Usopp, meanwhile, was busy inspecting the ship’s design, his keen eye for detail taking in every aspect of the Going Merry.
“This is a masterpiece!” he declared, his voice filled with awe. “The craftsmanship is incredible! With a ship like this, there’s nothing we can’t do!”
Zoro sat cross-legged on the deck, sharpening his swords with practiced precision. His calm demeanor stood in stark contrast to Luffy and Usopp’s excitement.
“A ship’s only as good as the crew sailing it,” he muttered, though there was a faint smirk on his face as he listened to his crewmates.
Aiko stood near the bow, her pink hair catching the sunlight as she gazed out at the horizon. She had never felt so small yet so alive. The events at Syrup Village had tested her in ways she never thought possible, but now, surrounded by her crewmates, she felt a growing sense of belonging. Nami approached her, her expression softening.

“You doing okay?” she asked.
Aiko nodded, a small smile playing at her lips.
“It’s just… a lot to take in. But I think I’m ready for whatever comes next.”
“Well, get used to it,” Nami said with a grin. “This is only the beginning.”

 

As the day went on, the crew began settling into their roles aboard the ship. Nami took it upon herself to organize the supplies and map out their next destination. With her impeccable navigational skills, she had pinpointed the location of a floating sea restaurant called the Baratie, known for its famous cuisine and eccentric atmosphere.

“Why a restaurant?” Usopp asked, leaning against the mast.
“Because we need a cook,” Nami replied matter-of-factly. “We can’t keep surviving on rations forever. If we’re serious about making it to the Grand Line, we’ll need someone who can prepare proper meals.”

“A cook, huh?” Luffy mused, lounging on the figurehead at the bow. “As long as they can make meat, I’m happy!”
Usopp laughed. “You’re so simple, Captain.”
Zoro glanced up from his spot on the deck.

“A cook would be useful. Better food means we’ll be better prepared for whatever fights come our way.”
Aiko listened quietly, her thoughts racing as she considered what lay ahead. The idea of meeting new people and venturing further into the unknown was both exciting and terrifying. She clutched the hilt of her sword, drawing strength from its familiar weight.

 

As the crew sailed toward the Baratie, their peaceful journey was interrupted by the appearance of a Marine ship on the horizon. Its white sails bore the unmistakable Marine insignia, and it was rapidly closing in on the Going Merry.
Zoro was the first to spot it, his sharp eyes narrowing as he stood and placed a hand on one of his swords.
“We’ve got company,” he said, his voice calm but alert.

Luffy’s face lit up with excitement.
“Marines? This could be fun!”
Nami groaned, rubbing her temples.

“Don’t even think about it, Luffy. We don’t have time for this.”
The Marine ship came closer, and at its bow stood Lieutenant Fullbody—a flashy and overly confident officer with slicked-back hair and a self-assured grin. He held a wine glass in one hand, sipping leisurely as he examined the Straw Hats through a spyglass.

“Pirates,” Fullbody said, his voice dripping with arrogance. “How unfortunate for them to cross paths with me. This will be an easy victory.”
Fullbody ordered his crew to fire a warning shot, and though their aim was comically off, it sent a plume of water spraying near the Going Merry. Luffy stood at the bow of the ship, grinning wildly.
“Hey! You want to fight? Bring it on!”
“Luffy, no!” Nami shouted. “We’re supposed to avoid drawing attention to ourselves!”
Ignoring her protests, Luffy stretched his arms and launched himself toward the Marine ship. The crew aboard the Going Merry could only watch in exasperation as their captain made quick work of Fullbody’s crew, effortlessly dodging their clumsy attacks and disarming them with his rubbery limbs.

 

Fullbody, desperate to salvage his reputation, decided to take matters into his own hands. He leapt onto the deck of the Going Merry, drawing his sword with a flourish.
“Surrender now, and I might go easy on you!” he declared.
Luffy laughed, tilting his head curiously.

“You’re not very strong, are you?”
Enraged, Fullbody lunged at Luffy, but the young pirate easily dodged the attack. With a well-timed Gomu Gomu no Pistol, Luffy sent the Marine officer flying back to his own ship, where he landed in a heap.
The rest of Fullbody’s crew scrambled to retreat, their morale shattered by their leader’s humiliating defeat. As the Marine ship sailed away, the Straw Hats erupted into laughter, their camaraderie stronger than ever.

 

After their victorious encounter with the Marines, the Straw Hat crew’s spirits were high as the distinctive silhouette of the Baratie came into view. The massive floating sea restaurant was a spectacle to behold—its structure resembled a giant fish, complete with colorful fins and a gaping mouth that served as the main entrance. The Baratie bobbed gently on the waves, with smaller vessels docking at its sides as patrons from all walks of life came and went.
The tantalizing aroma of freshly cooked meals wafted through the air as the crew approached. Luffy’s nose twitched, and his eyes sparkled with unrestrained excitement.

“Smells amazing!” he exclaimed, leaning so far over the edge of the Going Merry that Nami had to grab him by the back of his shirt to keep him from falling into the water.
“Don’t embarrass us!” she snapped, though her own curiosity was piqued by the bustling energy of the Baratie. For once, she wasn’t entirely annoyed by Luffy’s antics.

“This place is supposed to have the best food in the East Blue,” Usopp said, adjusting his goggles as he leaned over the railing for a better view. “I wonder what kind of pirates—or cooks—hang out here.”
Zoro, standing by the mast, crossed his arms and scanned the Baratie with a calm but observant gaze.
“It’s crowded. Let’s keep an eye out for trouble.”

“Trouble always finds us,” Nami muttered under her breath. Aiko, standing beside her, nodded silently, her grip tightening on the hilt of her sword. She felt a mix of anticipation and unease as they prepared to dock.

 

Docking at the Baratie, the crew secured the Going Merry and made their way onto the restaurant’s deck, which bustled with activity. Waiters in bright, flamboyant uniforms balanced trays laden with dishes, while rowdy patrons filled the tables. Pirates, merchants, and even a few Marines mingled in the open dining area, giving the place an air of organized chaos.

Luffy was the first to burst into the restaurant, his eyes gleaming as he scanned the room.
“Wow, look at all the food!” he shouted, drawing the attention of nearby diners. Without waiting for the others, he plopped down at an empty table and immediately began waving over a waiter.

“You’re supposed to wait to be seated!” Nami hissed, her frustration mounting as she followed him inside.
Usopp chuckled nervously, rubbing the back of his neck.
“Well, it’s Luffy. What did we expect?”

Zoro, as usual, was unfazed as he scanned the room for any potential threats. His hand rested lightly on the hilt of one of his swords, ready to intervene if things got out of hand.
Aiko trailed behind the group, taking in the lively atmosphere. The Baratie was unlike anything she’d ever seen—a mix of elegance and chaos, where laughter and shouting blended together in a symphony of life at sea. Her unease began to fade, replaced by a sense of wonder.

 

As the Straw Hats settled in, an all-too-familiar voice rang out, dripping with arrogance and self-importance.
“Well, well. If it isn’t the bunch of nobodies who embarrassed me earlier.”
The crew turned to see Lieutenant Fullbody entering the restaurant, his once-pristine Marine uniform now slightly rumpled from his earlier defeat. Despite his humiliation, he carried himself with exaggerated flair, determined to restore his wounded pride.
“Who’s that clown?” Zoro asked, raising an eyebrow.

“The Marine from earlier,” Nami replied with a sigh. “This can’t be good.”
Fullbody strutted into the dining area, attracting the attention of several patrons. He spotted the Straw Hats almost immediately and marched toward their table, his expression a mixture of smugness and annoyance.

“You must have a death wish to show your faces in public after what you did to me,” he said, slamming his hands on the table.
“Did what to you?” Luffy asked innocently, tilting his head. “Oh, you mean when I punched you? That was fun!”
Fullbody’s face turned bright red, and the other patrons began to snicker at his expense.
“You… insolent brat!” he sputtered, reaching for his sword.

Before Fullbody could draw his weapon, a plate sailed through the air and smashed into his head, sending him stumbling backward. The room erupted into laughter as the culprit revealed himself—a blond-haired man in a well-tailored suit, holding a tray with practiced ease.

 

“Oi, you’re scaring off the customers,” said the blond man, his voice calm but edged with irritation. He adjusted the cigarette between his lips and gave Fullbody a pointed look.

“If you’ve got a problem, take it outside. Otherwise, sit down, eat your food, and leave like everyone else.”
Fullbody glared at him, his hand still on the hilt of his sword.
“And who the hell do you think you are?” he demanded.
The man’s blue eyes narrowed, and he smirked.

“Sanji. Sous-chef of the Baratie. And you’re in my way.”
The tension in the room thickened as the two men stared each other down, but Fullbody ultimately backed off, muttering under his breath as he retreated to a corner table. Sanji turned his attention to the Straw Hats, his smirk softening into a more welcoming expression.

“Sorry about that,” he said, addressing the group. “What can I get for you?”
“Meat!” Luffy exclaimed, bouncing in his seat. “Lots of meat!”
Sanji chuckled, shaking his head.

“Coming right up.” He turned to leave, but his gaze lingered on Nami a moment longer than necessary.
“And what about you, miss? Anything you want is on the house.”
Nami raised an eyebrow, unimpressed by his flirtation.
“Just bring us something good,” she said coolly.

As Sanji walked away, Usopp leaned toward Luffy and whispered,
“This guy seems interesting.”
“He’s cool!” Luffy replied, grinning. “I like him already!”

 

As Sanji headed off to prepare the crew’s orders, the Straw Hats relaxed into the chaotic yet inviting atmosphere of the Baratie. Luffy couldn’t contain his excitement as he leaned back in his chair, already envisioning the plates of food coming his way.
“I can’t wait to try everything!” he exclaimed, nearly tipping his chair over.

“Please, at least try not to eat the entire kitchen,” Nami said, shooting him an annoyed glare while sipping a drink a waiter had just delivered.
Meanwhile, Zoro sat silently, observing the bustling restaurant with a wary eye. He wasn’t the type to let his guard down, even in a place as lively as this. Usopp, on the other hand, was enthralled by the variety of characters filling the Baratie.

“Look at all these people,” he said, nudging Aiko. “Pirates, merchants, Marines—you name it. This place is like a melting pot!”
Aiko nodded, her pink hair framing her face as she scanned the room. Though she felt uneasy surrounded by so many unfamiliar faces, there was a strange comfort in knowing her crew was with her.

“It’s loud,” she said softly, her voice barely audible over the clamor. “But… it feels alive.”
“Exactly!” Usopp replied, grinning. “This is what adventure’s all about—new places, new people, and new stories!”
Aiko’s lips curved into a small smile. She wasn’t sure she’d ever be as enthusiastic as Usopp, but his energy was infectious. Sitting among the Straw Hats, she felt a little closer to understanding why they loved this life so much.

 

Lieutenant Fullbody, nursing his wounded pride after his earlier defeat, sulked in the corner of the restaurant. Despite the bustling atmosphere, his glare was fixed firmly on the Straw Hats’ table. The humiliation of being so effortlessly defeated still burned fresh in his mind.

“This isn’t over,” Fullbody muttered under his breath. He beckoned one of the waiters over and whispered something to him, a devious grin spreading across his face.
Unbeknownst to the Straw Hats, Fullbody had no intention of letting their encounter end peacefully.

As the waiter disappeared into the kitchen, Aiko noticed the Marine lieutenant’s intense stare. Her instincts prickled, and her hand moved instinctively to the hilt of her sword.
“Nami,” she whispered, leaning closer to the navigator. “He’s watching us.”
Nami followed Aiko’s gaze and frowned.

“That guy? He’s harmless. Annoying, maybe, but he’s not a real threat.”
“I don’t know…” Aiko replied, her voice hesitant. “Something feels wrong.”
Nami placed a reassuring hand on Aiko’s shoulder.
“Relax. We can handle it if he tries anything stupid.”

 

True to his word, Sanji returned a short while later carrying a tray piled high with mouthwatering dishes. The aroma was intoxicating—roasted meats, steamed vegetables, and fresh seafood arranged with the precision of a master chef.
“Feast your eyes on this,” Sanji said, setting the plates down in front of the crew with a flourish. “The finest cuisine the East Blue has to offer.”
Luffy didn’t need to be told twice. He immediately dug in, shoveling food into his mouth at an alarming pace.

“This is amazing!” he shouted between bites, his voice muffled by the sheer amount of food he was chewing.
“Glad you like it,” Sanji replied, lighting a cigarette as he leaned against the edge of the table. His eyes drifted to Nami, and his expression softened into one of exaggerated adoration.

“And for the lovely lady, I made sure to prepare something extra special. Anything else you need, just say the word.”
Nami rolled her eyes but smirked.
“Thanks, I guess.”
Aiko, sitting quietly at the edge of the table, hesitated before taking a bite of her food. The flavors exploded on her tongue, and she couldn’t help but let out a soft gasp.

“This is… incredible,” she said, her cheeks reddening slightly.
Sanji noticed her reaction and smiled warmly.
“Glad you think so. A meal’s only as good as the company it’s shared with.”
Aiko quickly looked down at her plate, her face flushing deeper. She wasn’t used to compliments, especially from someone as confident as Sanji.

 

Just as the crew began to enjoy their meal, a commotion erupted from the back of the restaurant. The sound of shouting and clattering dishes echoed through the dining area, drawing the attention of everyone in the room.
“What’s going on back there?” Zoro asked, his hand already moving to one of his swords.
Sanji sighed, running a hand through his blond hair.
“Kitchen trouble. It happens.”

Before anyone could respond, the double doors leading to the kitchen burst open, and a furious voice roared through the Baratie.
“SANJI! What the hell is going on here?”
The voice belonged to Zeff, the imposing head chef of the Baratie. His tall, burly frame and chef’s hat made him an intimidating figure, and the peg leg he walked on only added to his commanding presence.

“You’re slacking off again, aren’t you?” Zeff barked, glaring at Sanji with the intensity of a storm.
Sanji shrugged, unbothered by the older man’s wrath.
“I’m serving customers. Isn’t that what you’re always yelling at me to do?”

“You call flirting with every girl who walks in here serving customers?” Zeff shot back, crossing his arms. “Get back in the kitchen before I kick you there myself!”
The other patrons watched the exchange with amusement, clearly used to the antics of the Baratie’s staff. Luffy, however, was completely unfazed.
“Who’s that guy?” he asked, his mouth still full of food.

“That’s Zeff,” Usopp replied, leaning closer. “I’ve heard of him. They call him Red-Leg Zeff. He used to be a pirate!”
“A pirate?” Aiko repeated, her eyes widening. She studied Zeff carefully, trying to imagine him as anything other than the gruff head chef he appeared to be.
“Yep,” Usopp said, nodding enthusiastically. “They say he sailed the Grand Line and survived! He’s supposed to be really tough.”
Sanji, clearly annoyed but not intimidated, turned back to the Straw Hats.

“Enjoy your meal. I’ll be back when the storm blows over.”
With that, he disappeared into the kitchen, leaving the crew to ponder the strange dynamic between him and Zeff.

 

As the commotion in the kitchen subsided, the crew returned to their meal. However, Aiko couldn’t shake the feeling that something was brewing beneath the surface. The tension between Sanji and Zeff, coupled with the ominous glare Fullbody continued to cast in their direction, made her uneasy.
Luffy, oblivious to the undercurrents of tension, leaned back in his chair with a satisfied grin.

“This place is awesome! I wonder if we’ll meet anyone here who wants to join our crew.”
“Don’t get your hopes up,” Nami replied, though there was a hint of a smile on her lips. “Not everyone’s as crazy as you.”
Usopp chuckled, adjusting his slingshot.

“Still, this Sanji guy seems interesting. I wouldn’t mind having a cook like him onboard.”
Aiko glanced at the kitchen doors, her fingers brushing the hilt of her sword. She didn’t know what lay ahead, but she knew one thing for certain—life with the Straw Hats would never be boring.

 

The Straw Hat crew continued enjoying their meal, unaware of the full extent of the brewing tension. While Luffy wolfed down his plates with gusto, Aiko kept glancing at Lieutenant Fullbody, who was still seated in the corner of the room with a dark scowl etched across his face. Something about him made her feel uneasy, as though he were plotting his next move.

Nami noticed Aiko’s distracted expression and leaned in.
“Still worried about that Marine?”
Aiko nodded slowly.

“I just… don’t trust him. He looks like he’s waiting for the right moment to cause trouble.”
Nami sighed.
“You’re not wrong. Guys like him tend to throw their weight around to save face. Just be ready to move if he does anything.”
Across the table, Usopp was regaling Luffy with an exaggerated story of his own bravery at Syrup Village.

“And then I single-handedly took down fifty pirates with just my slingshot!” he declared, waving his arms for dramatic effect.
“Whoa! That’s amazing, Usopp!” Luffy said, completely buying the tale.
Zoro, however, rolled his eyes.

“You’re really pushing it with ‘fifty,’” he muttered, earning a pout from Usopp.
The lively energy of the table was interrupted when Fullbody stood up abruptly, his chair scraping loudly against the floor. He marched toward the kitchen, his face twisted in anger and humiliation. Aiko stiffened, her hand instinctively going to her sword.
“He’s up to something,” she whispered.

 

Inside the kitchen, Fullbody barged in, startling the chefs and staff hard at work. He slammed a hand on the counter, knocking over a pot in the process.
“Where’s the blond waiter?” he demanded, his voice dripping with disdain.
Sanji, wiping his hands on a towel, turned to face him, completely unfazed.
“You’re interrupting my work,” he said coolly. “What do you want now?”

“You humiliated me out there,” Fullbody snarled. “Nobody makes a fool of me and gets away with it.”
Sanji shrugged, lighting a cigarette.
“You did that all on your own. Now get out of my kitchen before you ruin more of the food.”

Enraged, Fullbody grabbed a nearby plate and hurled it at Sanji. With remarkable agility, Sanji ducked and caught the plate mid-air, balancing it effortlessly on one hand. His eyes narrowed, and his voice dropped dangerously low.
“That was a mistake.”

Before the situation could escalate further, the kitchen doors burst open, and Zeff entered with his usual commanding presence.
“What the hell is going on in here?” he barked, glaring at both men.

“He started it,” Sanji said casually, jerking his thumb toward Fullbody. “Came in here ranting about who knows what.”
Zeff’s piercing gaze shifted to Fullbody, who suddenly found himself shrinking under the head chef’s intimidating glare.
“If you don’t have business here, get out,” Zeff growled. “And if you ever mess with my staff or my kitchen again, I’ll make sure you regret it.”
Fullbody scowled but knew better than to challenge Zeff. With one final glare at Sanji, he stormed out of the kitchen, fuming.

 

Back in the dining area, Sanji returned to the Straw Hat table, though his usual charm and flirtation were absent. He placed a dessert platter in front of Nami with a practiced flourish.
“Compliments of the house,” he said, his voice neutral.
Nami raised an eyebrow.
“What happened back there?”

“Just some idiot who doesn’t know when to quit,” Sanji replied. He glanced at Aiko and noticed her tense posture.
“You’re jumpy. Don’t let guys like him get under your skin.”
Aiko hesitated, then nodded.
“I’ll try,” she said softly.

Sanji gave her a faint smile before turning his attention back to the rest of the table.
“Anyway, enjoy your meal. Let me know if you need anything else.”
As Sanji walked away, Luffy tilted his head curiously.
“That guy’s pretty cool,” he said.

“Cool or not, he’s got a temper,” Nami replied, her tone thoughtful. “But he definitely knows his way around a kitchen.”
Usopp leaned closer.
“Do you think he’d join our crew? We need a cook, after all.”
Zoro smirked.

“You think anyone would willingly sign up for this madhouse?”
Luffy’s grin widened.
“I like him. Let’s see what happens.”

 

As the crew wrapped up their meal, the energy in the Baratie shifted. A heavy silence fell over the restaurant as a shadowy figure entered the room. The man’s tattered coat and menacing aura immediately set him apart from the other patrons. He carried himself with the confidence of someone accustomed to violence, and his presence alone was enough to make the other diners uneasy.

Aiko felt a chill run down her spine as she watched the man approach the counter.
“Who is that?” she whispered.
Nami’s expression darkened.
“Trouble.”

The man slammed a fist on the counter, demanding to speak with the head chef. Zeff appeared moments later, his demeanor as unshakable as ever.
“What do you want?” Zeff asked, his tone sharp.
The man grinned, revealing a row of uneven teeth.

“Word on the sea is you’ve got some of the best food around. I figured I’d stop by before the storm hits.”
“What storm?” Zeff asked, his eyes narrowing.
“You’ll see soon enough,” the man replied cryptically. With that, he turned and left the restaurant, leaving an uneasy tension in his wake.

 

As the Straw Hats enjoyed the fleeting calm at the Baratie, the shadowy figure who had cryptically warned Zeff exited the restaurant. However, the tension was far from gone. Unbeknownst to the crew, storm clouds were gathering—both figuratively and literally—on the horizon.

Inside the Baratie, the energy remained lively. Waiters bustled back and forth, balancing trays of food and drinks, while pirates and sailors swapped stories and laughter filled the air. Luffy, still energized by the incredible meal, leaned back in his chair and stretched with a satisfied grin.

“This place is awesome! I think we should stay here a while!” Luffy declared.
“That’s not how restaurants work,” Nami replied flatly, pinching the bridge of her nose. “We still need to find a way to pay for all this, you know.”
Zoro smirked as he leaned against the table, arms crossed. “You might want to figure that out sooner rather than later. The big guy in the kitchen didn’t look like the forgiving type.”

Usopp, who had been doodling a sketch of the Going Merry on a napkin, suddenly looked up in panic. “Wait, we have to pay? I thought Luffy was covering it!”
“Why me?!” Luffy asked, genuinely confused.
Aiko, seated quietly at the edge of the table, couldn’t help but smile at the chaos of her crewmates. But as she glanced toward the door, her smile faded. The cryptic words of the mysterious stranger, combined with the lingering unease from earlier, left her on edge.

 

While the crew debated their predicament, Lieutenant Fullbody—still nursing his wounded pride—wasn’t finished with the Straw Hats, or the Baratie staff. Seated in a far corner of the restaurant, Fullbody had been stewing ever since his earlier confrontation with Sanji. Determined to restore his reputation, he hatched a petty plan for revenge.

Fullbody slammed his wine glass on the table, drawing the attention of a nearby waiter.
“Bring me your finest bottle,” he ordered, his voice laced with malice. “I’ll show this place who they’re dealing with.”
Unbeknownst to Fullbody, his attempt to impress—or intimidate—would soon backfire spectacularly.

 

As the waiter rushed off to fulfill Fullbody’s order, the doors to the Baratie swung open once more, and a new figure entered the scene. The man was gaunt and bedraggled, his disheveled appearance drawing stares from the other patrons. His hollow cheeks and haunted eyes betrayed days—if not weeks—of starvation.
This was Gin, a member of the feared Don Krieg Pirates.

The room fell silent as Gin stumbled forward, his hand clutching his stomach. Despite his weakened state, there was something unnervingly sharp about him—an air of desperation and danger that set him apart from the usual rabble.
“I… I need food,” Gin rasped, his voice barely audible. “Please… anything.”

The waiters hesitated, glancing nervously at each other. It wasn’t uncommon for pirates to frequent the Baratie, but something about Gin’s presence made them wary.
Before anyone could respond, Lieutenant Fullbody let out a cruel laugh from his table.

“Well, look what we have here!” Fullbody sneered. “A starving dog begging for scraps. How pathetic.”
Gin’s hollow eyes flicked toward Fullbody, but he said nothing. His body swayed unsteadily. He looked ready to collapse at any moment.

Sanji, who had just emerged from the kitchen carrying a tray of desserts, stopped in his tracks. His sharp blue eyes locked onto Gin, and a flicker of understanding passed over his face. Without a word, he set the tray down on the nearest table and approached the desperate pirate.
“Sit down,” Sanji said firmly, pulling out a chair for Gin.

The other patrons watched in stunned silence as Sanji disappeared into the kitchen, only to return moments later with a steaming bowl of soup. He placed it in front of Gin and crossed his arms, his expression unreadable.
“Eat,” Sanji said simply.

 

Gin stared at the bowl in disbelief, his hands trembling as he reached for the spoon. He hesitated, as though waiting for the offer to be snatched away, before finally taking a bite. The warmth of the soup brought tears to his eyes, and he devoured the meal with an urgency born of sheer desperation.
Lieutenant Fullbody, meanwhile, was fuming.

“What do you think you’re doing?” he demanded, slamming his fist on the table. “That guy’s a pirate! He doesn’t deserve your pity!”
Sanji shot Fullbody a cold glare, his cigarette smoldering between his fingers.
“Everyone deserves a meal,” he said calmly. “Even pirates.”

Fullbody stood, his face red with anger.
“You’re going to regret that attitude,” he snarled. “Do you have any idea who you’re dealing with?”
Sanji smirked, blowing out a puff of smoke.
“Do you?”

The tension between the two men crackled in the air, but before the situation could escalate further, Gin stood up. He wiped his mouth with the back of his hand and bowed deeply to Sanji.
“Thank you,” Gin said, his voice hoarse but sincere. “I owe you my life.”
Sanji waved him off.

“Just don’t make a habit of starving yourself. It’s bad for business.”
Gin straightened, his gaze hardening as he turned to Fullbody. Without warning, he lunged forward, knocking the Marine lieutenant off his feet with a single punch. The other patrons gasped as Fullbody hit the floor, groaning in pain.
“That’s for the way you treated me,” Gin spat, his voice dripping with venom.

 

As Gin made his way to the door, he paused and glanced back at Sanji.
“You’re a good man,” he said. “But you should be careful. My captain… he’s coming. And when he does, this place won’t be the same.”
With that, Gin disappeared into the night, leaving the Baratie in stunned silence. The cryptic warning hung heavily in the air, and the patrons began whispering among themselves.

“What did he mean by that?” Usopp asked nervously, his eyes darting around the room.
“Who’s his captain?” Aiko added, her voice barely above a whisper.
Sanji didn’t answer. He simply turned and walked back toward the kitchen, his cigarette trailing smoke behind him.

 

The Baratie was abuzz with activity, but the cryptic warning left behind by Gin hung heavy in the minds of those paying close attention. While most patrons returned to their meals, those more attuned to the sea and its dangers couldn’t shake an impending sense of dread.
At the Straw Hats’ table, the crew debated their next steps. Luffy, ever carefree and seemingly oblivious to the tension, stuffed his face with the last scraps of food on his plate.

“This place is awesome!” he said between bites. “We should come back after we find the One Piece!”
“Assuming it’s still here after all this,” Nami said, frowning as she glanced toward the door where Gin had exited. “That guy wasn’t bluffing. Someone—or something—is headed this way, and it’s not going to end well for this restaurant.”
Zoro leaned back in his chair, his arms crossed.
“Let them come. I could use a good fight.”

“Zoro, not everything has to end with you swinging your swords,” Nami snapped. “We’re supposed to be staying out of trouble, remember?”
Usopp adjusted his goggles nervously.
“Yeah, but trouble has a way of finding us, doesn’t it? I mean, who knows who Gin’s captain might be? He could be some kind of pirate warlord with an army at his back!”

“Whatever happens, we’ll handle it,” Luffy said confidently, flashing his trademark grin.
His unwavering optimism seemed to lighten the mood, though Aiko remained quiet, her hands resting lightly on the table. Her gaze drifted to the restaurant’s entrance. She couldn’t shake the feeling that something dangerous was approaching. Despite the crew’s reassurances, a part of her still felt unprepared for what might be coming.

 

Meanwhile, in the Baratie’s kitchen, Head Chef Zeff assembled his staff to discuss the potential threat posed by Gin’s warning. The chefs muttered nervously among themselves, their usual jovial demeanor replaced by concern. Zeff’s peg leg thudded against the floor as he paced back and forth, his expression grave.
“Don Krieg,” he said finally, his voice gruff but steady. “If he really is headed here, we’re in for a hell of a fight.”
One of the younger chefs paled.

“Don Krieg? The Warlord of the East Blue? He’s supposed to command an entire fleet of ships!”
Sanji Speaks Up
“Not anymore,” Sanji interjected from his spot by the counter. The blond sous-chef leaned casually against the wall, his cigarette smoldering between his fingers. “Didn’t you notice the state that guy was in? Krieg’s crew must’ve taken a beating. A captain like that doesn’t send someone out begging for food unless they’re desperate.”

Zeff nodded, his jaw tightening. “Desperate pirates are the most dangerous kind. They’ve got nothing to lose.”
Sanji blew out a puff of smoke and shrugged. “Whatever happens, we’ll deal with it. No one’s taking over this restaurant on my watch.”

 

Out on the horizon, a massive ship approached the Baratie. Its sails were tattered, and the hull was scarred from numerous battles. Despite its battered appearance, the ship carried an ominous presence. It was the flagship of the Don Krieg Pirates, and its arrival sent shivers through the few sailors who happened to glimpse it.

Onboard, Don Krieg—the self-proclaimed “Warlord of the East Blue”—stood tall in his golden armor. His imposing figure was a stark contrast to the state of his crew, who looked weak and malnourished. Still, Krieg exuded confidence, his sharp eyes scanning the horizon.
“This is it,” he growled. “The Baratie. Food, supplies, and shelter. Everything we need to rebuild.”

The pirates around him cheered weakly, their enthusiasm dampened by exhaustion. Standing at the ship’s bow was Gin, his expression unreadable. He hadn’t told Krieg about the kindness he’d received at the Baratie—he wasn’t sure why, but a part of him felt compelled to protect the restaurant that had saved him.
Krieg’s lips curled into a sneer. “Prepare to dock. We’re taking everything they’ve got.”

Chapter 6: Whispers Of The Future

Summary:

“He looked at me like he knew something. Like he saw more than I do.”

Notes:

I'm sorry for the late chapter. I will try to puplish it on time as i can. (Thursday or Friday).
I also uploaded a new art, it i'snt that good like the first one, but i will improve my drawings someday.
https://pin.it/3ELDOkInc
I hope you like the new chapter.
:)

Chapter Text

The peaceful evening at the Baratie was shattered as Don Krieg’s ship collided with the restaurant, causing the entire structure to tremble. Screams erupted from the patrons as dishes clattered to the floor and waiters scrambled to maintain order.
“What the hell was that?!” Zoro shouted, leaping to his feet and grabbing his swords.
“It’s them,” Nami said grimly, her hands clenching into fists. “Who else could it be?”

The Straw Hats rushed toward the deck, weaving through the panicked crowd. Aiko followed close behind, her heart racing as she drew her sword. The weight of the blade felt reassuring in her hands, though she couldn’t ignore the fear creeping into her chest.
When they reached the deck, they were met with a sight that stopped them in their tracks. Don Krieg stood at the forefront of his ship, his golden armor gleaming even in the dim light. His cruel smile revealed sharp teeth, and his voice boomed across the water.
“I am Don Krieg, the strongest pirate in the East Blue!” he declared. “This restaurant, its food, and its supplies—everything here now belongs to me!”

 

As panic spread, Zeff and Sanji stepped onto the deck, their expressions as unyielding as ever. Zeff surveyed the scene with a critical eye, his hand resting on his hip.
“So, the warlord finally shows his face,” he muttered.
Sanji lit another cigarette, his gaze locked on Krieg. “Big talk for someone whose ship looks like it’s about to sink.”

Krieg’s eyes narrowed, and his smile widened. “You’ve got a sharp tongue, chef. Let’s see if you can back it up.”
Before anyone could respond, Luffy stepped forward, his straw hat casting a shadow over his face. “Hey, you!” he shouted, pointing at Krieg. “We’re not letting you take anything from this place!”

Krieg laughed, his voice echoing across the water. “And who are you supposed to be, kid? Some wannabe pirate?”
“I’m Monkey D. Luffy, and I’m going to be King of the Pirates!” Luffy declared, his grin returning.
Krieg’s laughter grew louder. “King of the Pirates? Don’t make me laugh. You’re nothing but a brat.”

As the standoff continued, the tension in the air grew thick. Aiko tightened her grip on her sword, stepping closer to the rest of the crew. She could feel the weight of what was coming, and though fear gnawed at the edges of her resolve, she knew she had to stand her ground.

 

Don Krieg’s declaration echoed across the trembling deck of the Baratie, silencing the last murmurs of the frightened patrons who dared to stay behind. The scent of sea air carried an undeniable sense of impending confrontation. The glint of Krieg’s golden armor seemed more menacing against the backdrop of the tattered remnants of his crew. And though his flagship was in shambles, his presence alone exuded authority and danger.

Zeff stood near Sanji, his stoic face betraying years of battle-hardened experience. “Don Krieg,” the former pirate captain muttered, more to himself than anyone else. “Figures a cockroach like him would show up here.”
Sanji took a drag from his cigarette, his sharp eyes scanning Krieg and his battered crew. “Cockroach or not, he’s still dangerous,” Sanji replied. “The question is: how desperate is he?”

 

As the confrontation escalated, Nami stepped closer to Aiko, whispering urgently, “Stick with me. These guys are dangerous, and Krieg doesn’t play fair.”
Aiko nodded, her grip tightening on the hilt of her sword. Though fear threatened to consume her, she refused to let it show. She looked to Usopp, who was nervously fumbling with his slingshot but still readying himself for what was coming.

“I don’t like this,” Usopp muttered, his voice shaking slightly. “But if Krieg’s crew thinks they can just walk in here and take whatever they want, they’ve got another thing coming.”

Zeff, still standing at the edge of the deck, raised his voice to address Krieg. “If you think you can take this restaurant without a fight, you’ve got another thing coming,” he said gruffly. “This is neutral territory, Krieg. Take your crew and leave before you make things worse.”
Krieg sneered. “Neutral territory? Don’t make me laugh. There’s no such thing in my world.”

 

The standoff was interrupted as a smaller boat approached the Baratie. At first glance, it seemed unremarkable, but as it drew closer, the crew onboard recognized the man standing at its helm: Gin.
The gaunt pirate leaped onto the Baratie’s deck, landing with a surprising amount of grace given his weakened state. He turned to face Krieg, his expression unreadable.

“Captain,” Gin said, his voice steady but tense. “This place isn’t what you think it is. We should leave.”
Krieg’s eyes narrowed, his voice dripping with suspicion. “What are you talking about, Gin? You’re the one who told me about this place.”
“I was wrong,” Gin replied, his tone growing more insistent. “These people helped me. They fed me when I had nothing. We don’t need to do this.”

For a brief moment, a flicker of doubt passed over Krieg’s face—but it was gone as quickly as it had appeared.
“Have you gone soft, Gin?” Krieg snarled. “I didn’t make you my second-in-command to give me lectures about morality.”

“They’re not a threat to us,” Gin insisted, his voice rising. “There’s no need to drag them into our fight.”
“You’ve gotten weak,” Krieg said coldly, his hand reaching for the massive spiked weapon slung across his back. “And weak men don’t survive in my crew.”

 

Before anyone could react, Krieg swung his weapon at Gin. The attack stopped inches from its target as Luffy’s outstretched arm grabbed the weapon mid-swing.
“Leave him alone!” Luffy shouted, his voice filled with conviction.
Krieg’s crew gasped in shock, their whispers filled with disbelief. The strength needed to counter Krieg’s swing wasn’t something they expected from someone like Luffy.

Krieg smirked, clearly unfazed. “You’ve got guts, kid. I’ll give you that. But guts won’t save you.”
Zoro, with his swords at the ready, stepped up beside Luffy. “We’ll see about that.”
Sanji appeared from the side, cigarette still in hand but his expression deadly serious. “No one wrecks my restaurant and gets away with it,” he said coldly.

 

The tension on the deck reached its peak as both sides prepared for battle. Aiko and Usopp stood back, ready to provide support as best they could. Aiko took a deep breath, her fear subsiding as she watched her crewmates stand fearlessly against the seemingly insurmountable threat before them.
This was the life of a Straw Hat Pirate, and she was ready to fight for it.

 

Before anyone could react, Krieg swung his colossal spiked shield at Gin, the weapon cutting through the air with deadly precision. The blow, however, never connected. Luffy’s outstretched arm, stretched to impossible lengths, intercepted the attack mid-swing. His fingers gripped the massive weapon tightly, holding it at bay.

“Leave him alone!” Luffy shouted, his voice filled with unyielding conviction.
Gasps rippled through Krieg’s crew as they stumbled backward, their expressions a mix of awe and disbelief. Few had the strength to stop Krieg’s devastating blows, let alone block them outright. Whispers began spreading among the crew about the strange young man who called himself a pirate.

Krieg locked eyes with Luffy, smirking as he pulled back his weapon. “You’ve got guts, kid,” he said, his tone mocking. “I’ll give you that. But guts won’t save you.”
Zoro stepped up beside Luffy, his swords gleaming in the faint light as he assumed his fighting stance. “We’ll see about that,” he said, his tone calm but sharp with anticipation.

To the left, Sanji emerged from the shadows of the deck, his movements deliberate and unhurried. His cigarette glowed faintly in the dim light, the smoke curling lazily around him. He exhaled slowly and fixed Krieg with a cold glare. “No one wrecks my restaurant and gets away with it,” Sanji said, his voice low and deadly serious.

The tension was palpable. On one side, the Don Krieg Pirates rallied behind their fearsome captain, their weapons drawn despite their visible exhaustion. On the other, the Straw Hats stood strong—Luffy, Zoro, and Sanji at the forefront, with Aiko and Usopp hanging back to provide support.

Aiko’s heart pounded in her chest as she watched her crewmates prepare for battle. Her grip on the hilt of her sword tightened, the rough texture grounding her in the moment. The fear she felt earlier began to ebb, replaced by a quiet resolve. This was the life of a Straw Hat Pirate, and she was ready to face it head-on.

 

With a guttural roar, Krieg swung his weapon again, this time aiming directly at Luffy. The attack forced Luffy to leap backward, his rubbery limbs coiling as he prepared his counterattack. “Gomu Gomu no Pistol!” he shouted, launching a powerful punch toward Krieg’s chest.

The impact sent a resounding shockwave across the deck, but Krieg stood firm, his golden armor absorbing the blow. He laughed cruelly, brushing off Luffy’s attack as though it were nothing. “Is that the best you’ve got?” Krieg taunted.
Zoro wasted no time. With a swift and calculated movement, he lunged at Krieg, his blades aiming for the weak points in the armor’s joints. “You’re too confident,” Zoro muttered, unleashing a flurry of strikes.

Krieg barely managed to block the assault with his massive shield, gritting his teeth as he felt the force of Zoro’s attacks. “Damn swordsman,” Krieg growled, pushing back with surprising strength.

Sanji joined the fray, his movements precise and fluid. With a spinning kick, he aimed for Krieg’s legs, hoping to throw the hulking pirate off balance. “Let’s see how well you fight when you’re on your knees,” Sanji said, delivering another kick to the side of Krieg’s knee.
Krieg staggered slightly, his expression darkening. “You pests,” he spat. “I’ll crush you all!”

 

While the others held Krieg at bay, Usopp took position at the edge of the deck, his slingshot loaded and ready. His hands trembled slightly, but he gritted his teeth and focused on taking out the lesser members of Krieg’s crew. “Take that!” he yelled, firing a projectile that struck one of the pirates in the forehead, knocking him unconscious.

Aiko stood nearby, her sword drawn but her feet hesitant to move forward. She watched the chaos unfold, her gaze darting between Luffy, Zoro, and Sanji as they fought Krieg. Her hands tightened around her weapon, the weight of her inexperience pressing down on her shoulders.
“You’ve got this, Aiko,” Usopp said suddenly, his voice breaking through her thoughts. “You’re one of us now. Just remember why you’re here.”

Aiko swallowed hard and nodded. She took a deep breath and stepped forward, positioning herself between the Straw Hats and the oncoming wave of Krieg’s pirates. As one of the crew charged toward her, she swung her sword with all her strength. The strike was clumsy but effective, forcing her opponent to stumble backward.
“I can do this,” Aiko muttered to herself, her confidence slowly building. She raised her sword again, ready to defend her friends.

 

Krieg’s laughter grew louder as he swung his weapon in a wide arc, forcing Luffy, Zoro, and Sanji to retreat momentarily. “You’re persistent,” Krieg said, his tone dripping with disdain. “But persistence won’t save you.”
From the sidelines, Gin watched the battle unfold, his hands clenched into fists. The conflict within him was evident—his loyalty to Krieg clashed with the debt he owed Sanji and the Baratie.

Finally, unable to bear it any longer, Gin stepped forward, placing himself between Krieg and the Straw Hats. “Captain,” he said, his voice steady but firm, “this is enough.”
Krieg glared at him, his expression twisting into one of fury. “Enough? You dare defy me?”
“They don’t deserve this,” Gin continued, his gaze unwavering. “Let them go.”

Krieg’s response was immediate and brutal. He swung his weapon at Gin, intending to crush him where he stood. But before the blow could land, Luffy’s outstretched arm caught the weapon once more.
“I said, leave him alone!” Luffy shouted, his voice filled with conviction.

 

The fight raged on, each side refusing to back down. The deck of the Baratie groaned under the weight of the battle, the air thick with the sounds of clashing weapons and shouted orders. Amidst the chaos, the resolve of the Straw Hats shone through.

Aiko, though still hesitant, found herself stepping into the fray. She wasn’t as strong or skilled as her crewmates, but she fought with everything she had, determined to protect the family she had found in the Straw Hats.
As the battle reached its peak, it became clear that this confrontation would shape the bonds of the crew forever.

 

Krieg’s oppressive laughter echoed across the battle-scarred deck of the Baratie, his spiked golden shield swinging in relentless, devastating arcs. Each strike splintered wood and sent shockwaves through the air, forcing the Straw Hats and Sanji to retreat momentarily. Despite his battered crew and damaged armor, Krieg remained undeterred, his confidence unshaken.

“You’re stubborn, I’ll give you that,” Krieg sneered, his voice reverberating with disdain. “But no amount of determination will help you defeat me. I am Don Krieg—the strongest in the East Blue!”
Luffy, his face set with unwavering resolve, slammed his foot into the deck, standing firm against the towering warlord. “It’s not about strength,” he countered, his voice steady. “It’s about protecting my friends. And I’ll beat you no matter what it takes!”

With a roar, Luffy launched himself forward, his limbs stretching impossibly far. “Gomu Gomu no Bazooka!” he shouted, slamming both hands into Krieg’s chest. The attack sent Krieg skidding backward, his feet grinding into the planks to steady himself. Though the blow left a dent in his armor, Krieg grinned through the impact.
“You can’t break me!” Krieg bellowed, raising his spiked shield for another swing. He aimed for Luffy’s side, but Zoro dashed in to intercept, his three swords flashing as he deflected the weapon with a calculated counterstrike. The force of the collision sent sparks flying as Zoro stepped back, sweat dripping down his brow.

“Just shut up already,” Zoro growled, readying himself for another attack.
Sanji circled around Krieg with fluid precision, aiming a powerful kick at the warlord’s exposed knee joint. “No one wrecks the Baratie and gets away with it,” Sanji muttered, his cigarette smoldering between his lips.

Krieg staggered, momentarily thrown off balance by the combined assault, but his sheer bulk and golden armor held firm. He swung his shield again in a wide arc, forcing the three to dodge once more.

 

Realizing brute force wasn’t enough to overpower his opponents, Krieg pulled out his ultimate weapon: the MH5 poison gas bomb. The metallic canister gleamed ominously in his hands, and a cruel smile spread across his face as he raised it above his head.
“This is where it ends for you,” Krieg declared. “Let’s see how you fight when you can’t even breathe!”

He hurled the bomb high into the air. The moment it detonated, a thick, noxious cloud began to spread rapidly across the deck. The sickly green haze engulfed the Baratie, forcing the Straw Hats and Sanji to scramble for cover.
“Damn it!” Sanji yelled, grabbing a cloth to cover his nose and mouth. “This guy really doesn’t care who he hurts!”

Gin, who had been frozen with indecision on the sidelines, made his move. Before the poison could engulf the entire deck, Gin sprinted forward and grabbed the canister, clutching it tightly to his chest. The poison burned his lungs as he gasped for air, but he refused to let go.
“Captain Krieg!” Gin shouted, his voice hoarse but resolute. “I won’t let you do this!”

“Gin, you fool!” Krieg roared, anger flashing in his eyes. “You would betray me for these weaklings?”
“They’re better than you,” Gin managed through gritted teeth, his body trembling as the poison took its toll. “They showed me kindness. Something you’ve never understood.”

 

Seeing Gin’s sacrifice reignited Luffy’s fury. With a determined cry, he leapt into the air, his limbs coiling like springs as he prepared his finishing move. “Gomu Gomu no Gatling!” Luffy shouted, his fists moving so fast they became a blur. The rapid-fire punches hammered into Krieg’s armor with relentless force, each blow driving the warlord back further and further.

Cracks began to spread across Krieg’s golden armor as Luffy’s onslaught continued. Finally, with one last devastating punch, Krieg’s shield shattered, and the warlord was sent crashing into the remnants of his flagship. The once-mighty Don Krieg lay defeated, his battered form a stark contrast to the arrogance he had displayed moments earlier.
His crew, demoralized and terrified, dropped their weapons and fled. The Baratie had been saved.

 

The battle with Don Krieg’s forces had reached a lull, but the tension on the Baratie’s deck didn’t ease. The broken remnants of Krieg’s armada drifted in the surrounding waters, their ships reduced to splinters. But even amidst this destruction, an ominous aura swept over the restaurant.
“Another ship?” Sanji muttered, leaning on the rail. “No... that’s not right.”

Out of the mists, a small coffin-shaped boat emerged, gliding silently over the waves. Its eerie silhouette was jarring against the chaos Krieg had left in his wake. A single figure stood aboard—a man clad in a long black coat, with a wide-brimmed hat that cast a shadow over his striking, hawk-like eyes. The massive, curved blade on his back seemed almost too large for the modest vessel.

Dracule Mihawk, the world’s greatest swordsman, had arrived.
Zoro’s sharp gaze locked onto Mihawk immediately. His hand instinctively moved to the hilt of his swords. “It’s him,” Zoro said, his voice low but electric with intensity. “Dracule Mihawk.”

Luffy tilted his head. “Who’s that?”
“He’s the man I have to defeat,” Zoro said, his jaw tightening. “The world’s greatest swordsman.”

 

Mihawk stepped onto the Baratie with deliberate precision, his presence commanding the attention of everyone on the deck. His golden eyes scanned the crowd with a detached air, pausing briefly on Zoro before moving to Krieg’s ruined forces.
“I pursue only the fleeting time,” Mihawk said dismissively. “But perhaps this will entertain me for a moment.”

Zoro stepped forward, his swords glinting in the light. “Dracule Mihawk!” he called out, his voice steady but filled with resolve. “I challenge you.”
Mihawk turned his full attention to Zoro, his expression one of mild interest. “Why?”
“Because I’m going to be the world’s greatest swordsman,” Zoro replied. “To do that, I have to defeat you.”

For a moment, Mihawk said nothing. Then, a faint smile tugged at his lips. “Very well,” he said, reaching for his weapon—not the massive blade on his back, but a tiny cross-shaped dagger hanging from his neck.
The choice startled everyone watching. Usopp practically fell over in shock. “A dagger? Is he mocking Zoro?”

But Zoro didn’t waver. He drew his three swords and assumed his fighting stance, his focus locked entirely on Mihawk. “You can fight me however you like,” he said firmly. “I’ll take you down no matter what.”
Aiko watched from the sidelines, her heart pounding as the duel began. She could see the intensity in Zoro’s movements, the absolute commitment in every swing of his blades. But as Mihawk deflected each strike effortlessly, her chest tightened with dread.

 

Zoro’s attacks were fierce and unrelenting, but Mihawk moved with a grace and ease that made their difference in skill painfully clear. Every swing of Zoro’s swords met Mihawk’s tiny blade, and every clash only reinforced the impossibility of the fight.
“I can see your resolve,” Mihawk said calmly, deflecting another attack. “But you lack strength.”

Zoro gritted his teeth and lunged forward with a powerful overhead strike, but Mihawk parried it with a single flick of his dagger. The force sent Zoro stumbling backward, his breath coming in sharp gasps.

Aiko’s fingers tightened around the edge of the railing. She wanted to believe in Zoro, to trust in his strength, but doubt crept into her mind. “Zoro…” she whispered, her voice barely audible.

 

As the duel neared its climax, Zoro raised his swords for one final attack—his ultimate technique. “Santoryu: Ougi—Sanzen Sekai!” he shouted, his movements swift and precise.
Mihawk, recognizing Zoro’s sincerity, drew his full-sized blade, Yoru, for the first time. The sheer weight of the weapon seemed to shift the air around them, and Mihawk moved with an effortless precision that seemed almost otherworldly.

Time seemed to slow for Aiko. As Mihawk swung his blade, a strange sensation rippled through her—an unfamiliar yet overwhelming clarity. Suddenly, she wasn’t just watching the fight—she was seeing it. She saw Mihawk’s blade moving toward Zoro, saw the devastating blow that would follow, and saw... blood.
Zoro’s defeat. His death.

Aiko gasped, the vision jolting her back to reality. “No!” she shouted, her voice piercing through the tense silence.
Without thinking, she sprinted forward, her body moving faster than her mind could process. She reached Zoro just as Mihawk’s blade descended, grabbing him by the shoulder and pulling him back. The strike landed inches from where Zoro had stood, slicing cleanly through the floorboards.

Mihawk raised an eyebrow, lowering his blade. His piercing gaze locked onto Aiko, studying her with newfound interest. “Observation Haki,” he murmured under his breath, too quietly for anyone else to hear.
Aiko stumbled backward, her breath ragged. She didn’t know what had just happened—why she’d moved, or how she’d seen what she’d seen. Her hands trembled, and her mind raced to make sense of the moment.

Zoro turned to her, his expression a mix of confusion and frustration. “What are you doing?” he demanded. “I told you not to interfere.”
“You would’ve died,” Aiko said, her voice shaking. “I—I don’t know how I knew, but I saw it. I couldn’t just stand there.”
Mihawk sheathed his blade, his expression unreadable. “Interesting,” he said softly. “Very interesting.”

 

Despite Aiko’s intervention, Zoro refused to end the fight without Mihawk’s acknowledgment. He stood tall, even as blood dripped from the wounds he had already sustained. “If you’re going to kill me,” Zoro said, his voice steady, “do it from the front.”
Mihawk’s eyes narrowed, and for a moment, the air grew thick with tension. Then, slowly, he stepped back, sheathing his blade once more. “You have courage,” he said. “And potential. Grow stronger, Roronoa Zoro. Until the day you can surpass me.”

Zoro fell to his knees, his swords clattering to the ground. Luffy rushed to his side, gripping his shoulder. “You’ll be okay,” Luffy said, his voice firm.
Zoro smiled weakly. “I’ll never lose again,” he said, the words a solemn vow. “Until I defeat him.”

 

As Mihawk departed, his small boat vanishing into the horizon, Aiko sat on the deck, her head in her hands. The adrenaline that had carried her through the fight was gone, replaced by confusion and fear.
“What was that?” she whispered to herself. “What did I see?”

Sanji crouched beside her, his usual smirk replaced by a softer expression. “Whatever it was, it saved his life,” he said. “But you’ve got to figure it out, or it’ll eat you alive.”
Aiko looked at him, her mind spinning with questions she didn’t yet know how to ask. For now, all she knew was that she had witnessed something extraordinary—and that it had changed her forever.

 

The Baratie’s deck felt eerily still after Mihawk’s departure. The tension that had gripped the crew moments earlier lingered in the air, but the world’s greatest swordsman had vanished as silently as he had arrived. Zoro lay on the ground, his chest heaving as he clung to consciousness. Blood seeped from the deep wounds left by Mihawk’s final strike, staining the wooden boards beneath him.

Luffy knelt at his side, his straw hat casting a shadow over his face. “You’ll be fine, Zoro,” he said firmly, though his voice betrayed a tinge of worry. “You’re strong. You’ll pull through.”
Zoro coughed, a faint smile tugging at the corners of his mouth. “I didn’t think he’d spare me,” he admitted weakly. “But… I’m glad he did. Now I have a chance to keep my promise.”

Aiko hovered nearby, her sword still clutched tightly in her hand. Her mind raced with the memory of what had just happened—the strange vision, the clarity she had felt, and her instinctive rush to pull Zoro out of harm’s way. She had saved him, but she couldn’t shake the weight of Mihawk’s piercing gaze as he studied her afterward. It was as though he had seen something in her that even she didn’t understand.

“Are you okay?” Usopp asked, nudging Aiko’s arm gently. His voice was quieter than usual, the weight of the situation sobering his usual energy.
“I don’t know,” Aiko admitted, her voice barely above a whisper. “I don’t know what just happened.”
Sanji approached the group, a first aid kit in hand. He crouched beside Zoro, casting a brief glance at Aiko. “Whatever it was, it saved his life,” Sanji said bluntly. “But if you’re going to keep putting yourself in danger like that, you’d better figure it out.”

Aiko nodded, her fingers loosening their grip on her sword. She watched silently as Sanji began tending to Zoro’s wounds, her thoughts swirling with questions. What had she seen? How had she known? And why did Mihawk seem to recognize it?

 

As the Straw Hats and the Baratie staff began to recover from the grueling battle, Luffy, Zoro, and the others returned to the Going Merry, eager to plan their next steps. But as they approached the dock, a sinking feeling settled over them.
The Going Merry wasn’t there.

“What the... where’s the ship?!” Usopp shouted, his eyes widening in panic.
Zoro scanned the horizon, his jaw tightening. “It’s gone.”
“It can’t just be gone!” Usopp yelled, pacing back and forth. “It was tied up right here!”
Aiko stepped forward, her hand gripping the edge of the dock as she stared out at the water. “Nami…” she whispered, her voice barely audible.

The others turned to her, confusion etched on their faces. “What about Nami?” Luffy asked, his expression hardening.
Aiko hesitated before answering, her gaze shifting to the horizon. “I… I think she took the ship.”
The realization hit the crew like a physical blow. Zoro’s fists clenched at his sides, his frustration evident. “She stole it?” he growled. “After everything we’ve been through?”

Luffy, however, remained calm. He stared at the horizon, his expression unreadable. “She wouldn’t just leave,” he said quietly. “There has to be a reason.”
Usopp threw up his hands, his voice tinged with disbelief. “A reason? She stole the ship, Luffy! How can you just—”
“She’s our friend,” Luffy interrupted, his voice firm. He turned to face the others, his straw hat casting a shadow over his determined eyes. “We’re going after her. Whatever’s going on, we’re going to bring her back.”

 

The crew exchanged glances, each of them coming to terms with Luffy’s unwavering faith in Nami. Sanji, leaning casually against the dock, smirked. “Looks like I’ll be tagging along with you guys for a while,” he said. “Can’t have you starving to death while you’re chasing after your navigator.”
Zoro grunted, crossing his arms. “This crew’s just one mess after another. But if Luffy’s going, I’m going.”

Aiko, though still shaken by the betrayal, found herself nodding. “I’ll help too. Whatever she’s dealing with… we’ll face it together.”
Nami’s Resolve

Far away, aboard the Going Merry, Nami stood at the helm, her expression unreadable. The shoreline of her home island loomed in the distance, its familiar outline stirring a storm of emotions within her.

Her grip on the helm tightened. “I don’t have a choice,” she muttered to herself. “I have to do this.”
As the ship drew closer to the island, Nami’s mask of composure slipped for a moment, revealing the anguish beneath. Tears glistened in her eyes, but she quickly wiped them away, steeling herself.

“I’m coming, Arlong,” she said, her voice low but filled with determination. “This ends now.”

Chapter 7: A Navigator's Tears, Her Freedom, Their Fight

Summary:

"Family isn’t just blood. It’s the ones who fight for you when you can’t." — Aiko
"No matter how heavy the map, you don’t carry it alone anymore." — Aiko to Nami

Notes:

Next week will be a break. I'm really sorry that i can't post a new chapter next week.
But i will try to post next week a new art of Aiko :)
I hope you like it

Chapter Text

The Straw Hats sailed toward Cocoyasi Village, the faint outline of the island growing larger on the horizon. The Going Merry creaked gently as it cut through the calm waves, but the mood aboard the ship was anything but tranquil. Nami’s betrayal and sudden departure hung over the crew like a storm cloud, and though Luffy remained steadfast in his determination to find her, the others couldn’t shake their unease.

“She came here for a reason,” Luffy said, breaking the tense silence. He stood at the bow, his straw hat tilted slightly as he gazed ahead. “We’re going to figure out what’s going on.”

Zoro leaned against the mast, his arms crossed. “If this Arlong guy is half as dangerous as people say, this isn’t going to be easy.”
“Dangerous?” Usopp muttered, his voice rising an octave as he paced nervously across the deck. “They say he’s a Fishman! I’ve heard Fishmen are ten times stronger than normal humans! What if he has an army? What if—”

“Calm down,” Sanji interrupted, exhaling a plume of smoke as he leaned against the railing. “We’ll handle it. If Nami’s involved with this guy, there’s a good reason. We’ll figure it out.”

Aiko stood near the edge of the ship, her gaze fixed on the island ahead. She gripped the hilt of her sword tightly, her knuckles white. She didn’t know what to expect, but a growing resolve stirred within her. Whatever Nami was facing, they would face it together.

As the ship docked near the village, the crew stepped ashore, their eyes scanning the unfamiliar surroundings. Cocoyasi Village was quiet—too quiet. The small coastal town had an air of desolation, its streets eerily empty. The few villagers they encountered avoided making eye contact, their heads bowed as they hurried past.
“This place is... strange,” Usopp whispered, glancing around nervously.

“It’s fear,” Sanji said bluntly. “They’re afraid.”
“Afraid of what?” Aiko asked softly, though she had a sinking feeling she already knew the answer.

 

As the crew ventured deeper into the village, they stumbled upon a modest house surrounded by a small garden. A woman with short, blue hair stood in the yard, tending to a row of flowers. She looked up as the Straw Hats approached, her expression guarded but calm.
“Who are you?” she asked, her tone cautious but not unkind.

“We’re looking for Nami,” Luffy said without hesitation. “She’s our friend, and we need to talk to her.”
The woman’s eyes narrowed slightly, and a flicker of recognition crossed her face. “You’re her crew,” she said quietly. “I’m Nojiko—Nami’s sister.”
The crew exchanged surprised glances. “Sister?” Zoro echoed, raising an eyebrow.

Nojiko nodded, gesturing for them to follow her inside. “Come in. I think it’s time you knew the truth.”

 

Inside the small, cozy house, the Straw Hats gathered around a low table as Nojiko began her story. Her voice was steady, but the pain in her words was unmistakable.
She explained how, years ago, the Arlong Pirates had taken control of Cocoyasi Village. Led by the ruthless Fishman Arlong, they imposed heavy taxes on the villagers, demanding money in exchange for their lives. Those who couldn’t pay were killed without mercy.

Nojiko paused, her eyes distant as she recounted the most painful memory of all—the day Arlong killed their mother, Bell-mère. Though Bell-mère had the chance to lie and save herself, she chose to sacrifice her life to protect Nami and Nojiko. Her final words were a declaration of her love for her daughters, a memory that still haunted Nojiko and Nami to this day.

“Nami was just a child,” Nojiko said, her voice trembling. “But she made a deal with Arlong to save the village. She agreed to join his crew as a cartographer and create maps for his conquests. In return, Arlong promised that if she could pay him 100 million Berries, he would free Cocoyasi.”

A heavy silence fell over the room as the crew absorbed the weight of Nojiko’s words. Usopp looked down at his hands, his usual chatter replaced by quiet reflection. Sanji’s cigarette burned down to its filter, forgotten in his hand. Even Zoro, who rarely showed emotion, clenched his jaw tightly.

“She’s been doing this all alone,” Aiko murmured, her voice barely audible. “All this time, she’s been carrying this by herself.”
“Not anymore,” Luffy said firmly, his voice cutting through the tension. His eyes burned with determination as he stood. “We’re going to help her. We’ll stop Arlong and free this village.”

Nojiko’s eyes widened, and she shook her head. “You don’t understand. Arlong is a Fishman. He’s ten times stronger than any human. And his crew... they’re monsters. You’ll be throwing your lives away.”
Luffy grinned, his confidence unwavering. “Doesn’t matter. Nami’s our navigator, and we’re not going to let her do this alone.”

 

As the crew prepared to leave Nojiko’s house, the mood was resolute. They now understood the burden Nami had been carrying and the impossible choice she had made to protect her village. But for the Straw Hats, there was no question—they would fight for her, no matter the odds.

“I’ll do whatever it takes to help her,” Aiko said, her hand resting on the hilt of her sword. “She’s part of our crew. That means we don’t let her fight alone.”
Sanji nodded, his usual flirtatious demeanor replaced by a rare seriousness. “We’ll bring her back. And I’ll make sure she never has to cry again.”
Zoro smirked faintly. “It’s about time we had a real fight.”

As they left the village and made their way toward the towering fortress of Arlong Park, Luffy led the way, his stride confident and determined. The sight of the oppressive stronghold only strengthened their resolve. Whatever awaited them inside, they would face it together.

 

The towering fortress of Arlong Park loomed ominously in the distance, its jagged architecture reflecting the cruelty and power of its inhabitants. The stronghold was unlike anything the Straw Hats had seen before, with its walls decorated with monstrous fish-like motifs and the surrounding waters patrolled by Fishman sentries. The oppressive aura it radiated sent chills through the group, but their determination to bring back Nami only grew stronger.

 

Inside Arlong Park, Nami stood in front of the pile of stolen wealth she had painstakingly accumulated over years of theft and hardship. The heavy bag of 100 million Berries sat in her hands, its weight seeming to match the burden she had carried for so long.

She approached Arlong, who lounged smugly on his throne, his shark-like grin widening as he saw her. His crew—the Fishmen who enforced his tyranny over the East Blue—stood around him, their menacing gazes locked on Nami.

“I’ve got it,” Nami said, her voice steady despite the turmoil raging inside her. “The full amount. All 100 million Berries. Now free my village.”
Arlong’s grin grew wider, his sharp teeth glinting as he leaned forward. “Oh, Nami, you’ve done well,” he said, his tone dripping with mockery. “You’ve always been so reliable.”

Nami’s fists tightened at her sides. “You promised me, Arlong. The deal was, I give you this, and you let Cocoyasi Village go.”
Arlong chuckled, a low and sinister sound that sent shivers down Nami’s spine. “Oh, don’t worry,” he said. “I never go back on my word. Your village is free… as long as there are no misunderstandings.”

Before Nami could respond, a detachment of Marines, bribed by Arlong, entered the fortress and seized the bag of money. The realization hit her like a tidal wave—Arlong had no intention of letting her go. He had manipulated her from the beginning, using her desperation against her.

“No…” Nami whispered, her voice breaking as she fell to her knees. Tears streamed down her face as the weight of Arlong’s betrayal crushed her. “No! You promised me!”

Arlong’s cruel laughter echoed around her. “You’ll never escape me, Nami,” he said. “You’re part of my crew, and that’s where you’ll stay.”

 

Outside the gates of Arlong Park, the Straw Hats arrived, their faces set with determination. The crew had followed Nami’s trail to this moment, and the sight of the fortress only strengthened their resolve.

“This is it,” Luffy said, stepping forward. “We’re bringing her back.”
Zoro rested his hand on the hilt of his sword. “Let’s hope this Arlong guy is as strong as they say. I could use a good fight.”

“You’re insane,” Usopp muttered, though he adjusted his slingshot nervously, readying himself for the battle ahead.
Sanji straightened his tie, a rare seriousness in his expression. “If Nami’s been through hell because of this guy, then we’re going to make him pay.”

Aiko’s heart pounded as she tightened her grip on her sword. She hadn’t known Nami for long, but the bond they had formed during their journey made it clear—Nami was family, and family didn’t get left behind.

As they approached the gates, the first wave of Fishmen sentries appeared, their hulking figures blocking the crew’s path. One of them, towering over the Straw Hats, sneered as he flexed his webbed hands. “You humans think you can challenge us?” he mocked. “You’re nothing compared to Arlong.”

Luffy cracked his knuckles, a wide grin spreading across his face. “Move,” he said simply. When the Fishman refused, Luffy launched himself forward with a powerful Gomu Gomu no Pistol, knocking the sentry flying into the fortress wall. The impact left a visible dent, and the other Fishmen hesitated, stunned by the display of strength.

“That’s just the beginning,” Luffy said, his grin widening. “Let’s go.”

 

The crew stormed through the gates of Arlong Park, the sound of clashing weapons and shouts filling the air. Zoro took on multiple Fishmen at once, his blades flashing as he countered their superior strength with skill and precision. “You’re big,” he said, dodging a heavy swing from a trident. “But size doesn’t mean anything against me.”

Sanji fought with his characteristic flair, his kicks delivering devastating blows to anyone who dared to challenge him. “You Fishmen may be strong in the water,” he said, lighting a cigarette in the middle of a spin kick. “But on land, I’m the king.”

Usopp stayed at the back, using his slingshot and wits to take down enemies from a distance. His hands trembled as he loaded another shot, but his aim was true. “I may be a coward,” he muttered, firing at an advancing Fishman. “But even cowards can fight for their friends!”

Aiko, her confidence growing with each swing of her sword, stood side by side with her crewmates. Her movements were less polished than Zoro’s, but the fire in her eyes made up for it. She blocked an attack aimed at Usopp, deflecting the blow and countering with a strike that sent her opponent reeling.

As the crew fought their way deeper into the fortress, Luffy broke off from the group, his focus solely on finding Nami. The sounds of the battle faded into the background as he ascended a staircase leading to the central chamber.

 

Luffy entered the chamber to find Nami kneeling on the ground, her hands clutching the tattoo on her arm—the mark of the Arlong Pirates. Her tears fell freely as she sobbed, the betrayal and hopelessness overwhelming her.

“Nami,” Luffy said softly, stepping closer. She didn’t respond, her shoulders shaking as she wept.
“Nami!” Luffy called again, louder this time. She turned to look at him, her tear-streaked face filled with anguish.
“Luffy…” she whispered, her voice barely audible.

He crouched beside her, his expression serious but gentle. Without a word, he took off his hat and placed it on her head—a gesture that carried more meaning than any words could. “We’re here,” he said simply. “You’re not alone anymore.”

Nami’s lip quivered, and for a moment, she was silent. Then, with a trembling voice, she said the words that had been building in her heart for years. “Please… help me.”

Luffy stood, turning to face the rest of the room—and the shadow of Arlong himself, who waited in the central courtyard. Luffy’s eyes burned with fury as he clenched his fists. “You got it,” he said. “We’ll take him down.”

 

Luffy stood tall at the gates of Arlong Park, his shadow stretching across the jagged ground. Behind him, the rest of the Straw Hat crew readied themselves for what was bound to be their toughest fight yet. The fortress loomed over them, a cruel symbol of domination, and somewhere inside, Arlong awaited them. But this wasn’t just a fight for freedom—it was a fight for Nami.

Luffy’s expression was unreadable as he gazed at the towering gates. “We’re here for Nami,” he said, his voice calm but resolute. “No one hurts my crew and gets away with it.”

Zoro unsheathed his swords, the steel gleaming in the sunlight. “Let’s see if this Arlong guy is as tough as they say,” he muttered, a hint of excitement in his voice.
Sanji exhaled smoke from his cigarette and adjusted his tie. “I’ll make them regret laying a finger on Nami.”

Usopp’s hands trembled as he readied his slingshot, but his jaw was set with determination. Aiko, standing beside him, gripped her sword tightly, her heart pounding as she prepared for the battle ahead.

“Let’s go,” Luffy said, kicking the gates open with a single, powerful strike. The resounding crash echoed through the fortress as the Straw Hats entered Arlong Park.

 

Inside the fortress, the Fishmen reacted to the intrusion with roars of anger and surprise. The towering Arlong, with his shark-like grin and menacing aura, stepped forward from his throne-like perch. His sharp teeth glinted as he surveyed the crew with a mixture of amusement and disdain.

“Well, well,” Arlong said, his deep voice booming. “The so-called pirate crew Nami’s been wasting her time with. You really think you can take me on?”
Luffy stepped forward, his straw hat casting a shadow over his face. “We’re here to take Nami back,” he said simply. “And we’re going to take you down.”

Arlong’s grin widened, and his laughter filled the fortress. “Foolish humans,” he sneered. “You’re nothing compared to a Fishman. Strength is everything, and we’re ten times stronger than you’ll ever be.”

“We’ll see about that,” Zoro said, stepping into his fighting stance.
Sanji smirked, his leg lifting slightly in preparation. “If you’re as strong as you talk, this will be over quickly.”

 

The battle erupted with explosive force. The Straw Hats scattered across the fortress, each taking on their own set of challenges. The Fishmen charged at them, their superior strength and size making them formidable opponents, but the crew’s determination burned brighter than ever.

Zoro, still recovering from his injuries sustained during his duel with Mihawk, faced off against Hatchan, Arlong’s six-armed octopus swordsman. Despite his wounds, Zoro fought with unwavering resolve, his blades flashing as he countered Hatchan’s attacks. “You’re strong,” Zoro admitted, blocking a strike from Hatchan’s six swords. “But strength isn’t everything.”

Sanji, meanwhile, took on a group of Fishmen guarding the pool surrounding the fortress. His kicks were precise and devastating, each one sending his opponents flying. “You don’t deserve to call yourselves pirates,” Sanji muttered, his voice cold. “Real pirates don’t betray their own.”

Usopp, though initially hesitant, found himself face-to-face with Chew, one of Arlong’s officers. Using his wits and slingshot, Usopp outmaneuvered the Fishman, luring him into traps and using his surroundings to gain the upper hand. “I might not be the strongest,” Usopp said, his voice trembling but steady. “But I won’t run away. Not this time.”

Aiko paired up with Usopp to guard his back, her blade clashing against the weapons of approaching enemies. Though less experienced, she fought with everything she had, her movements growing sharper with every swing.

Meanwhile, Luffy stormed toward the central courtyard, where Arlong awaited him. His steps were deliberate, his gaze unwavering. This fight wasn’t just about taking down a tyrant—it was personal. Arlong had hurt Nami, and Luffy wouldn’t stand for it.

 

The final showdown began as Luffy stepped into the courtyard. Arlong towered over him, his imposing figure casting a long shadow. The two stared each other down, the air thick with tension.

“You’re weak,” Arlong said, his voice dripping with contempt. “You can’t possibly beat me.”
Luffy grinned, his fists tightening. “Strength isn’t just about muscles,” he replied. “It’s about fighting for the people you care about.”

Arlong lunged forward with incredible speed, his massive jaws snapping shut inches away from Luffy. But Luffy dodged effortlessly, his rubbery body bending and twisting in impossible ways. “Gomu Gomu no Pistol!” he shouted, launching a punch that slammed into Arlong’s chest.

The fight escalated quickly, with both combatants exchanging powerful blows. Arlong’s sheer strength and ferocity made him a terrifying opponent, but Luffy’s unpredictability and resolve kept him in the fight. The fortress shook with each impact, the walls cracking under the force of their attacks.

 

Meanwhile, Nami watched the battle unfold from the shadows, her heart heavy with a mix of fear and hope. For so long, she had carried the burden of protecting Cocoyasi Village alone. But now, seeing the Straw Hats fight for her, she felt something she hadn’t allowed herself to feel in years—relief.

“They’re risking everything for me,” she murmured, her fingers brushing against the tattoo on her shoulder. Tears welled in her eyes as she clenched her fists. “I can’t let them fight alone.”

Drawing her resolve, Nami stepped forward, ready to confront her past and fight for her future.

 

Zoro’s swords clashed against the six blades wielded by Hatchan, Arlong’s six-armed octopus swordsman. Despite his injuries from his duel with Mihawk, Zoro fought with precision and focus, blocking and countering Hatchan’s relentless strikes.

“You’re strong for a human,” Hatchan said, grinning as he swung three swords at once. “But I’ve got six arms. You can’t match me!”
Zoro smirked, his movements fluid as he deflected the attacks. “You talk too much,” he replied, leaping back to create distance. “Let’s see how you handle this!”

With a burst of energy, Zoro unleashed his signature technique, Tatsumaki (Dragon Twister), creating a spiraling whirlwind of slashes that forced Hatchan to retreat. The attack left deep gashes on Hatchan’s arms, but the Fishman quickly regrouped.

“I’m not done yet!” Hatchan roared, charging forward with renewed fury.
Zoro gritted his teeth, his body screaming in protest from his earlier injuries, but his resolve was unshaken. “I’ll never lose again,” he muttered under his breath, his thoughts briefly flashing back to his promise to Luffy. “Not until I become the world’s greatest swordsman!”

 

In another part of the fortress, Sanji faced off against Kuroobi, Arlong’s lieutenant and a master of Fishman Karate. The two traded blows with fierce intensity, Sanji’s kicks meeting Kuroobi’s powerful strikes.

“You don’t stand a chance against me,” Kuroobi sneered, his movements fluid and precise. “Fishman Karate is unmatched on land or sea!”
Sanji dodged a devastating punch aimed at his chest, countering with a spinning kick to Kuroobi’s side. “Karate, huh?” Sanji said, exhaling smoke from his cigarette.

“Let’s see how it holds up against my feet.”
Kuroobi retaliated with a powerful water-based attack, sending a torrent of water toward Sanji. The force of the attack slammed Sanji into the wall, leaving him momentarily dazed.

“Pathetic,” Kuroobi said, approaching with a smug grin.
But Sanji wasn’t done yet. With a determined glint in his eyes, he rose to his feet, blood dripping from the corner of his mouth. “You shouldn’t underestimate a cook,” he said, delivering a flurry of kicks that drove Kuroobi back.

 

Meanwhile, Usopp found himself cornered by Chew, Arlong’s sharpshooting Fishman. Chew’s confidence was palpable as he launched water bullets at Usopp, forcing the sniper to take cover behind a pile of debris.

“Come out and fight, coward!” Chew shouted, laughing as he approached.
Usopp’s hands trembled as he loaded his slingshot, but he took a deep breath to steady himself. “I’m not a coward,” he muttered, his voice shaking but resolute. “I’m a brave warrior of the sea!”

Drawing on his resourcefulness, Usopp used the environment to his advantage, setting traps and luring Chew into vulnerable positions. When the opportunity presented itself, Usopp fired his slingshot, hitting Chew squarely in the face with a fiery projectile.

Chew roared in pain, stumbling back as smoke rose from his scorched skin. Usopp seized the moment, delivering a final strike that sent the Fishman crashing to the ground.

“I… I did it!” Usopp exclaimed, a mix of disbelief and triumph in his voice.

 

At the heart of the fortress, Luffy faced off against Arlong in a battle that shook the very foundation of Arlong Park. The clash between the two captains was fierce, each blow sending shockwaves through the surrounding area.

Arlong’s strength was overwhelming, his shark-like features and powerful jaws giving him the edge in raw physical power. He tore chunks of the environment apart with his teeth, hurling them at Luffy with deadly precision.

“You’re just a human,” Arlong sneered, lunging forward with his jaws open wide. “You can’t beat me!”

Luffy dodged the attack, his rubbery body twisting and stretching to avoid the sharp teeth. “I’m not just a human,” Luffy replied, his voice steady. “I’m the captain of the Straw Hat Pirates, and I’m here to protect my friend!”

With a fierce determination, Luffy launched his attack. “Gomu Gomu no Gatling!” he shouted, his fists moving so fast they became a blur. The rapid barrage of punches slammed into Arlong, forcing the Fishman back.

But Arlong wasn’t done yet. He grabbed a massive saw-like weapon, Kiribachi, and swung it at Luffy with terrifying force. The blade tore through the air, narrowly missing Luffy as he leapt out of the way.

“You’ll never beat me in strength!” Arlong roared.
Luffy’s expression hardened as he grabbed onto the weapon with his rubbery arms, pulling it from Arlong’s grasp. “Strength isn’t everything,” he said. “It’s about fighting for the people you care about!”

 

The fight reached its climax in the central room of Arlong Park—the cartography room where Nami had been forced to work for years. Seeing the maps she had painstakingly drawn under Arlong’s orders fueled Luffy’s rage.

“You made her do all this?” Luffy said, his voice low and dangerous. He turned to face Arlong, his fists trembling with fury. “You hurt her… you made her suffer… and you think you can get away with it?!”

Arlong laughed, his confidence unshaken. “She’s mine! She’ll always be mine!”
Luffy’s response was immediate and filled with raw emotion. “She’s not yours!” he shouted. “She’s my friend!”

With a powerful Gomu Gomu no Battle Axe, Luffy brought his foot down on the cartography room, shattering the floor beneath him. The impact caused the entire structure to collapse, sending debris flying in all directions.

As the dust settled, the symbol of Arlong’s tyranny lay in ruins. Luffy emerged from the wreckage, bruised but victorious. Arlong’s broken body lay motionless nearby, his reign of terror finally over.

 

The villagers of Cocoyasi gathered outside the destroyed fortress, their eyes filled with hope and disbelief. For years, they had lived under Arlong’s rule, and now, at last, they were free.

Nami stood among them, tears streaming down her face. She approached Luffy, her voice trembling as she said, “Thank you… thank you for everything.”
Luffy grinned, placing his straw hat on her head once more. “You’re part of my crew,” he said simply. “That’s what friends do.”

As the sun rose over the horizon, the Straw Hats stood together, their bond stronger than ever. The battle at Arlong Park was over, but their journey was just beginning.

 

As the dust settled over the ruins of Arlong Park, the oppressive silence was broken by the soft murmurs of Cocoyasi’s villagers. They had gathered outside the wreckage, their faces a mix of disbelief, hope, and tentative joy.

For the first time in years, the oppressive shadow of Arlong and his Fishman crew was gone.
Luffy stood among the rubble, bruised and battered but grinning widely.

His straw hat sat firmly on his head as he looked over at Nami, who stood at the edge of the crowd. Her hands trembled as she stared at the destroyed fortress—the symbol of her pain and captivity, now in ruins.

 

Tears welled up in Nami’s eyes as she stepped forward, her knees threatening to buckle under the weight of her emotions. She glanced at Luffy, the crewmates who had fought so fiercely for her, and the villagers who had lived in fear for so long. Everything she had fought for, sacrificed for, was now within reach.

Slowly, she turned toward the villagers, her voice shaking as she said, “You’re free now. Arlong… he’s gone.”

The villagers erupted into cheers and sobs, their pent-up relief spilling out in waves. Genzo, the grizzled village sheriff, approached Nami with tears streaming down his face. “You’ve done it, Nami. You’ve done what we couldn’t.”

“No,” Nami replied, her voice thick with emotion. She looked back at the Straw Hats, her eyes meeting Luffy’s. “They did it.”
Genzo nodded, his gaze shifting to Luffy. “Thank you,” he said simply, his voice filled with gratitude. “You’ve saved us all.”

Luffy tilted his hat back, his grin widening. “No problem,” he said. “That’s what friends are for.”

 

As the villagers celebrated their freedom, the Straw Hats regrouped, each of them nursing their injuries. Zoro leaned against a pile of rubble, his breathing heavy as he wiped the blood from his swords.

Sanji sat nearby, lighting a cigarette as he surveyed the scene with a satisfied smirk. Usopp fidgeted with his slingshot, a proud yet sheepish grin on his face.
“Aiko,” Usopp said, nudging her lightly. “We actually did it. We took them down.”

Aiko nodded, a small smile forming on her lips. “We did it together,” she replied. “That’s what matters.”
Sanji exhaled a puff of smoke, turning toward Nami, who approached them hesitantly.

She stood in front of Luffy, her hands clutching the brim of his hat. “Luffy,” she began, her voice trembling, “I don’t deserve—”

Before she could finish, Luffy interrupted, his grin never faltering. “Don’t say that,” he said firmly. “You’re part of our crew. That’s all that matters.”

Tears streamed down Nami’s face as she placed Luffy’s hat back on his head. “Thank you,” she whispered.
Zoro smirked from his spot on the rubble. “Took you long enough to come back,” he teased.

“Welcome home, Nami-swan!” Sanji chimed in, hearts practically forming in his eyes.
The lighthearted banter drew a laugh from Nami, the first genuine laugh she had allowed herself in what felt like forever. For the first time, she felt truly free.

 

As the sun set over Cocoyasi Village, the villagers gathered to celebrate their newfound freedom. The Straw Hats joined them, eating, drinking, and laughing with the people they had fought to save. But as the night wore on, it became clear that it was time for the crew to move on.

The next morning, Nami stood at the edge of the village, her belongings packed and ready. Genzo and Nojiko stood beside her, their expressions a mixture of pride and sadness.

“Take care of her,” Nojiko said to Luffy, her voice firm but warm. “She may not say it, but she needs you.”
Luffy nodded. “Don’t worry. She’s one of us.”

Nami hugged her sister tightly, tears threatening to spill once more. “I’ll come back,” she promised. “When we find the One Piece, I’ll come back.”
Nojiko smiled, though her eyes glistened with unshed tears. “I’ll hold you to that.”

As the Straw Hats boarded the Going Merry, the villagers waved them off, their cheers carrying across the water. Nami stood at the helm, her hand resting on the tattooed arm she had once hated. She had found her freedom, her family, and her purpose.

And with her crew by her side, she was ready for whatever lay ahead.

 

With Cocoyasi Village behind them, the Straw Hats sailed toward the horizon, their bond stronger than ever. Each member of the crew reflected on the journey so far, the challenges they had faced, and the adventures that still awaited them.

“Where to next, Captain?” Zoro asked, leaning against the railing.
Luffy grinned, his eyes sparkling with excitement. “To the Grand Line!” he declared, pointing toward the endless sea. “That’s where the real adventure begins!”

As the Going Merry sailed forward, the Straw Hats laughed and cheered, ready to face whatever dangers awaited them. Together, they were unstoppable. Together, they would chase their dreams.

Chapter 8: A Legacy Buried Beneath the Deep

Summary:

“Whatever lies ahead, I feel ready for it. The Sea King, the Millennium Dragon—these moments are leading me toward something. I just have to uncover the truth.” - Aiko

“The world is changing, and so is his fate.” - Monkey D. Dragon

Notes:

Hello, I'm Back. I hope you like the new fanart I uploaded on Pinterest and I hope you like the story :)
See you next Week.

Chapter Text

With the defeat of Arlong and the liberation of Cocoyasi Village, the Straw Hat Pirates had earned a well-deserved moment of respite. The villagers’ celebrations lingered long into the night, but for the crew, it was a brief pause before the horizon beckoned them onward.

As the Going Merry creaked against gentle waves, the crew made their preparations to set sail, each of them reflecting on the battles they had endured and the bonds they had forged.

 

The morning sun cast its golden light on Cocoyasi Village as the Straw Hats gathered at the harbor. Villagers waved from the shore, their faces filled with gratitude and admiration. For years, they had been imprisoned by fear, but now, thanks to the crew’s bravery, they were free.

Nojiko stood next to Genzo, her arms folded but her smile betraying her emotions. “Nami,” she said, her voice steady despite the lump in her throat. “Don’t forget where you came from. You’ll always have a home here.”

Nami adjusted her orange backpack, now filled with her belongings, and turned to face her sister. Her voice wavered slightly as she said, “I won’t forget. I promise.”
Genzo stepped forward, holding something behind his back. “Before you go,” he said, clearing his throat awkwardly, “there’s something I want you to have.”

He revealed a newly polished staff—the weapon Nami had trained with as a child. Its surface gleamed in the sunlight, the wood sturdy and smooth. “You’ll need something to protect yourself out there,” he said, his tone gruff but caring.

Nami hesitated, her eyes glistening. “Thank you,” she whispered, taking the staff and holding it close.
“Take care of her,” Nojiko said, directing her words toward Luffy.

Luffy gave her a wide grin, tilting his straw hat. “Don’t worry. She’s part of my crew.”

 

Once aboard the Going Merry, Nami took her place at the helm. She felt a sense of relief and excitement as she unfurled the new map she had drawn—a map that would guide them to their next destination. “We’re heading for Loguetown,” she announced, her voice carrying newfound confidence.

“Loguetown?” Usopp asked, scratching his head. “What’s so special about that place?”
“It’s where the Pirate King, Gol D. Roger, was executed,” Nami explained. “Some people call it the ‘Town of Beginnings and Endings.’ It’s the last stop before the Grand Line.”

Sanji raised an eyebrow. “So, we’re about to step into some serious pirate territory.”
Zoro, leaning casually against the mast, smirked. “Good. I was starting to get bored.”

Luffy’s excitement was contagious as he leapt onto the figurehead of the ship, pointing toward the horizon. “Let’s go!” he shouted, his grin wide. “The Grand Line is waiting for us!”

 

As the crew sailed toward Loguetown, the waters grew calm, and the air carried a faint tension. Aiko stood near the edge of the deck, her eyes scanning the horizon. Though the battle at Arlong Park was behind them, a part of her couldn’t shake the feeling that something—or someone—was watching them.

“Hey, Aiko,” Usopp called, walking up beside her. “You’ve been quiet. Everything okay?”
Aiko hesitated, gripping the hilt of her sword. “I don’t know,” she admitted. “It feels... too quiet.”

Usopp’s expression turned nervous as he glanced at the open sea. “Quiet is good, right? It means no giant sea monsters or crazy enemies.”

Before Aiko could respond, a shadow passed beneath the water, sending a ripple across the surface. The entire crew froze as Luffy leaned over the railing, his eyes sparkling with curiosity. “What was that?” he asked, his voice filled with wonder.

 

The sudden appearance of the Sea King left the Straw Hats momentarily frozen. The creature’s massive form seemed to block out the sun, its sharp teeth glinting ominously as it stared down at the ship. For most of the crew, the encounter was one of awe and caution—but for Aiko, it felt strangely different.

As the Sea King’s glowing eyes locked onto the ship, Aiko felt a faint shiver run down her spine. It wasn’t fear exactly—it was something deeper, a sense of familiarity she couldn’t quite explain. For a fleeting moment, she thought she heard something—a low, echoing hum, almost like a voice reverberating in the back of her mind.

She blinked and shook her head, the strange sensation disappearing as quickly as it had come. “That was... odd,” she murmured to herself, her grip on the ship’s railing tightening.

“You okay, Aiko?” Usopp asked, glancing at her nervously. “That thing was HUGE! You’re not freaking out, are you?”
“I’m fine,” Aiko replied, though her tone was distracted. She cast one last glance at the water where the Sea King had disappeared, her mind racing with questions she didn’t yet have answers to.

Luffy laughed, his carefree attitude breaking the tension. “Maybe it likes us,” he said, grinning widely. “Or maybe it knows I’m going to be King of the Pirates!”
As the crew resumed their journey, Aiko couldn’t shake the feeling that there was more to the encounter than met the eye.

Though she didn’t understand it yet, something about the Sea King had resonated with her—a connection waiting to be revealed in the future.

 

The Sea King’s departure left the Going Merry rocking gently on the waves, but the tension it had brought lingered like an unspoken question. The crew’s conversation soon returned to lighter topics, yet Aiko remained deep in thought. Something about the encounter had left her unsettled—not frightened, but... curious.

For the rest of the day, Aiko found her attention drifting back to the moment when the Sea King’s glowing eyes had locked onto hers. The faint hum she had felt—it had been fleeting, almost like an echo from the depths of her mind. She shook her head, trying to focus on the tasks at hand. There was no time to dwell on strange sensations, not with Loguetown on the horizon.

 

As the sun dipped toward the horizon, a Marine ship came into view on the distant waves, its sails unmistakable with the World Government’s insignia. Nami spotted the vessel first from the crow’s nest, her sharp eyes narrowing as she recognized the danger.

“We’ve got company!” she shouted.
Luffy, perched near the helm, tilted his head curiously. “Marines? I guess they heard we’re famous!”

“They must’ve gotten word about Arlong,” Zoro muttered, tightening the bandana around his head. “We should’ve known they wouldn’t let us off so easily.”
Sanji stepped onto the deck, cigarette between his lips, his casual demeanor contrasting with the tension in the air. “So, what’s the plan, Captain?”
“Full speed ahead!” Luffy declared, his grin widening. “We can’t let them catch us before we reach Loguetown!”

Nami quickly adjusted the sails as Usopp scrambled to secure the rigging, his panicked muttering audible as he worked. Aiko took position near the edge of the ship, her sword at the ready. “If they get close, we’ll have to fight,” she said, her voice steady despite the knot of nerves tightening in her stomach.

The Marine ship gained on them, cannons firing warning shots that splashed dangerously close to the Going Merry. The crew worked together with precision, dodging the attacks and keeping their ship just out of range. As the chase continued, Aiko couldn’t help but glance back at the water, half expecting to see the Sea King return.
But it didn’t. Not yet.

 

Their escape from the Marines led the crew to a smaller island, shrouded in mist and perched with jagged rocks. Anchoring the Going Merry in a quiet cove, they ventured ashore in search of fresh supplies and a place to hide from their pursuers. The island, though seemingly deserted, had an air of mystery about it.

It wasn’t long before the crew encountered a young girl named Apis, who had fled from the Marines herself. The child had a curious connection to the creatures of the island, speaking to them as though she could understand their thoughts and feelings. Apis introduced herself hesitantly, but the warmth of the Straw Hats quickly put her at ease.

When Aiko watched Apis interact with the animals, something stirred deep within her. The way Apis spoke, her calm tone and gentle demeanor, reminded Aiko of the strange sensation she’d felt aboard the ship—the hum that had filled her mind when the Sea King had locked eyes with her. It was a small moment, but it lingered in her thoughts, as if hinting at something she would come to understand later.

Apis eventually revealed the presence of the Millennium Dragon, a creature of legend that was being pursued by the Marines. Though the Straw Hats had been wary of getting involved with the Marines so soon after Arlong Park, Luffy’s boundless curiosity—and his strong moral compass—led the crew to protect the dragon and help Apis.

 

While the events on the island unfolded, Aiko found herself drawn to the Millennium Dragon, much like she had been to the Sea King. Though the dragon didn’t display the same intelligence or awareness as the Sea King had, its presence brought back the same faint hum she had felt during their encounter on the ocean.

One night, as the dragon rested and the rest of the crew slept, Aiko approached the creature cautiously. She couldn’t explain what compelled her to do it—only that something inside her told her she had to.

The dragon’s slow, steady breathing filled the air, and Aiko felt a strange warmth radiating from its presence. She hesitated, then reached out a hand, placing it gently against the dragon’s massive side. For a brief moment, that same hum filled her mind, clearer now but still indistinct. It was like a whisper on the edge of hearing, just out of reach.

“What is this?” she murmured, her voice barely audible. “Why do I feel... connected?”
The dragon shifted slightly, but it didn’t wake. Aiko withdrew her hand, her mind buzzing with questions she didn’t yet have answers to. She stood there for a long moment, staring at the creature as the moonlight bathed the island in silver light.

In the coming episodes, this connection—first with the Sea King and now faintly echoed with the Millennium Dragon—would reveal itself as something more profound. Though Aiko didn’t know it yet, the path forward would lead her to an understanding of a rare and powerful ability, one tied to the vast and mysterious creatures of the sea.

 

With Apis and the Millennium Dragon safely hidden, the Straw Hats continued their journey toward Loguetown, the final stop before the Grand Line. Though the adventure on the island had been brief, it left an impact on Aiko. She felt a growing sense of purpose, though she couldn’t quite put it into words.

As the Going Merry sailed on, Luffy’s excitement grew. He stood at the ship’s bow, pointing dramatically at the horizon. “Next stop: Loguetown!” he declared, his grin as wide as ever.

Behind him, Nami rolled her eyes but couldn’t help smiling. “Try not to cause too much trouble when we get there,” she said.
“No promises!” Luffy replied, laughing.

Aiko leaned against the railing, watching the horizon. Whatever lay ahead, she felt ready for it. The Sea King, the Millennium Dragon—these moments were leading her toward something, and she was determined to uncover the truth.

 

The Loguetown marketplace bustled with life, its vibrant stalls and enthusiastic vendors creating an atmosphere of controlled chaos. Among the throng of townsfolk, pirates, and traders, the Straw Hats found themselves at the center of attention—a trio of unusual characters navigating the sea of noise and color.

“I’m telling you, Nami, this grappling hook would revolutionize our adventures,” Usopp insisted, waving the contraption above his head like a trophy. “Imagine it—The Mighty Usopp swooping from ship to ship with grace and flair! It’s exactly what the crew needs.”

Nami shot him a glare sharp enough to cut through steel. “What the crew needs is basic supplies,” she snapped, grabbing the grappling hook and placing it back on the vendor’s table. “No distractions, no gadgets—just food and water.”

“Hey now,” the vendor chimed in, lifting his hands in protest. “This grappling hook is top-tier craftsmanship. If anything, you’re underestimating its value.”
Nami raised an eyebrow, crossing her arms. “Twenty Berries for the oranges, fifty for the rice, and that’s final. The grappling hook stays right where it is.”

The vendor stared at her, his confidence wavering under the weight of her unimpressed gaze. “Well, uh… deal,” he muttered, visibly defeated.
Behind them, Aiko chuckled softly, shaking her head at the exchange. “You have to admit, Nami’s got it down to an art form.”

“She’s terrifying,” Usopp whispered dramatically to Aiko, earning himself a sharp smack on the arm from Nami.

 

As the trio moved away from the stall, the busy hum of the marketplace shifted, the crowd parting as an imposing figure entered the fray. Daddy Masterson, his wide-brimmed hat casting shadows over his sunglasses, leaned against a post with casual confidence. His sniper rifle gleamed on his shoulder, a weapon polished and poised for action.

“Well, now,” Daddy began, his voice steady but sharp. “What do we have here? Pirates, wandering around in plain sight.”

Nami stiffened, her hand instinctively moving to her belt pouch. Aiko subtly adjusted her grip on her sword, her sharp eyes watching every movement Daddy made. “We’re just buying supplies,” Nami replied coolly, keeping her tone measured. “Nothing illegal about that.”

Daddy smirked, his gaze landing on Usopp, who froze mid-step. “That slingshot of yours,” Daddy said, nodding toward the weapon. “Doesn’t seem like much of a pirate’s tool.”

Usopp bristled immediately, stepping forward with exaggerated bravado. “I’ll have you know this slingshot is a precision instrument!” he declared, raising his chin. “I’ve defeated countless enemies with it. It’s not just a weapon—it’s a work of art!”

Nami groaned, facepalming as Aiko subtly moved closer to Usopp, positioning herself between him and Daddy. “Don’t provoke him,” she whispered. “This guy doesn’t look like someone we want to mess with.”

Daddy’s smirk widened, his sunglasses glinting as he tilted his head. “Countless enemies, huh? That’s a bold claim for someone waving a toy.”
“It’s not a toy!” Usopp exclaimed, his pride flaring. “If you don’t believe me, I’ll prove it!”

“Oh?” Daddy’s tone held a note of amusement as he shifted his rifle slightly. “Prove it, then. A duel. You and me. Right here.”

 

As Daddy’s challenge echoed through the marketplace, the growing crowd attracted attention from various personalities within Loguetown. Tashigi, the Marine swordswoman, noticed the commotion as she patrolled nearby. Adjusting her glasses, she frowned at the scene, debating whether to intervene.
“This could get messy,” Tashigi muttered to herself, her hand hovering near the hilt of her blade.

In the shadows, Buggy the Clown watched with growing interest, his distinctive nose twitching as he recognized the Straw Hats. “Well, well,” Buggy sneered, cracking his knuckles. “Looks like those little brats are here in Loguetown. This might be my chance to get some payback.”

Meanwhile, Smoker, the formidable Marine captain, stood atop a nearby building, watching the crowd below with his usual intensity. Clouds of smoke curled from his cigars as his sharp eyes scanned for any sign of trouble—or opportunity.

 

Back in the marketplace, Usopp faltered slightly as Daddy’s sniper rifle glinted in the sunlight. “A duel? Me? Now?” he stammered, his voice a mixture of bravado and panic.

“You don’t have to do this,” Aiko said softly, stepping closer. “We can walk away.”

Usopp shook his head, gripping his slingshot tightly. “I can’t walk away. If I do, I’ll look like a coward. And I’m not a coward! I’m a brave warrior of the sea!”
Aiko’s lips quirked upward in a small, encouraging smile. “Well, if you’re a brave warrior, then show him what you’ve got. We’re right here.”

Nami crossed her arms, her expression skeptical but supportive. “Don’t embarrass us,” she muttered.

 

The marketplace fell silent as Daddy and Usopp faced off, the crowd creating a wide circle around them. Daddy’s calm demeanor was unnerving, his every movement deliberate as he raised his rifle and smirked. “Let’s see if that slingshot of yours is really worth the bragging.”

Usopp swallowed hard, his hands trembling as he loaded a projectile into his slingshot. “This’ll be easy,” he muttered to himself, though his voice betrayed his nerves. “Just like target practice. No problem.”

Aiko glanced at Nami, lowering her voice. “He’s nervous.”
“He’s always nervous,” Nami replied, shaking her head. “But somehow, he pulls it off.”

As the duel progressed, Usopp relied on his resourcefulness, setting smoke pellets to obscure Daddy’s vision and using the environment to his advantage. Daddy fired precise shots that grazed Usopp’s vest and knocked small items from nearby stalls, demonstrating his unparalleled sharpshooting skills.

“You’ve got guts, kid,” Daddy admitted, his tone grudgingly respectful. “But guts don’t win fights.”
Usopp’s eyes narrowed as he took aim, his trembling hands finally steadying. With a deep breath, he fired, the projectile striking Daddy’s rifle and sending it clattering to the ground.

The crowd erupted into cheers as Usopp let out a triumphant shout.
“I did it! I did it!” Usopp exclaimed, his chest swelling with pride.

 

As the crowd dispersed and the trio moved away from the scene, Aiko found herself glancing out at the ocean once more. The faint hum from the encounter with the Sea King lingered in her mind, like a thread connecting her to something far beyond the horizon.

Usopp, basking in his victory, waved his slingshot in the air. “See? I’m a genius! A true sharpshooting warrior!”
Nami sighed, shaking her head but smiling nonetheless. “Let’s just focus on getting what we need.”

Aiko’s voice was quiet as she murmured, “There’s more out there... more than we know.” Though the others didn’t notice her words, the weight of her instincts carried forward, foreshadowing a connection to the sea that would reveal itself in time.

 

The chaotic streets of Loguetown bustled with tension as the Straw Hats found themselves on the brink of danger. Luffy, drawn to the legendary execution platform where Gol D. Roger had uttered his famous last words, climbed to the top, his carefree grin hiding the weight of his dream.

While Luffy admired the scaffold, Captain Smoker—a Marine infamous for his relentless pursuit of pirates—closed in. His looming figure was unmistakable, twin cigars billowing clouds of smoke as he strode forward. Smoker’s face remained impassive as he stared at Luffy with steely determination.

“You chose the wrong place to make a spectacle of yourself, Straw Hat,” Smoker declared, gripping his jitte, which was infused with Sea Prism Stone—a weapon capable of neutralizing devil fruit powers. “It’s over.”

Luffy jumped down from the platform, landing lightly on his feet despite the tension radiating from the gathered crowd. “Over?” he repeated, his tone light and full of defiance. “I haven’t even started yet!”

Smoker didn’t waste time with further words. He lunged forward, his jitte aimed directly at Luffy. The young pirate tried to dodge, but Smoker’s mastery over the Moku Moku no Mi (Smoke-Smoke Fruit) made escape nearly impossible. Tendrils of smoke surrounded Luffy, immobilizing him as the Marine captain advanced.

 

Just as Smoker prepared to strike the decisive blow, an ominous gust of wind swept through the town. The gathered crowd froze as the weather shifted dramatically—dark clouds rolled in, and thunder rumbled in the distance. A storm was brewing, but it wasn’t entirely natural.

Out of the shadows stepped a mysterious figure cloaked in black. His presence alone seemed to command the winds, and his piercing gaze cut through the chaos. Smoker’s eyes widened slightly as he recognized the man standing before him: Monkey D. Dragon, the leader of the Revolutionary Army and Luffy’s father, though the latter detail was unknown to Luffy at the time.

“What are you doing here, Dragon?” Smoker demanded, his voice edged with suspicion. The Marine captain wasn’t used to being caught off guard, but Dragon’s sudden appearance was nothing short of alarming.

Dragon didn’t answer Smoker directly. Instead, he turned his attention to Luffy, who looked at the cloaked man with curiosity but no recognition. “You have a powerful will,” Dragon said, his voice calm but commanding. “And the world is about to take notice.”

Luffy blinked, momentarily confused. “Who are you?” he asked, tilting his head.
Dragon’s only response was a faint smile before the storm intensified. The wind howled through the streets, forcing Smoker to shield his face as debris flew in all directions. The unnatural gale created an opening for Luffy, who broke free from Smoker’s smoke grip and dashed toward safety.

 

Back at the docks, the rest of the Straw Hats waited anxiously aboard the Going Merry. Nami kept a sharp eye on the approaching storm, her navigator’s instincts telling her it was anything but ordinary. “Something’s happening,” she muttered, her grip tightening on the helm.

Usopp paced nervously, clutching his slingshot. “Where’s Luffy? He should’ve been back by now!”

“Relax,” Zoro said, though his own stance remained vigilant. “He’ll make it.”
Sanji, leaning against the railing, lit a cigarette and exhaled slowly. “If he doesn’t, I’ll make whoever’s holding him back pay.”

Suddenly, Luffy appeared, sprinting toward the ship with his trademark grin. “Guys! Let’s go!” he shouted.
Behind him, Smoker emerged from the storm, his expression dark with frustration. “You won’t escape me, Straw Hat!” he roared.

But as the winds continued to rage, Smoker could only watch as the Going Merry sailed out of the harbor, its crew united and their spirits unbroken.
On the deck, Luffy laughed as he collapsed onto the floor. “What a rush!” he said, beaming at his crewmates.

Nami frowned, glancing back at the storm still raging over Loguetown. “That storm... it wasn’t natural. Someone helped us.”
Luffy shrugged, still oblivious to Dragon’s involvement. “Whoever it was, they were pretty cool!”

 

As the Going Merry disappeared into the horizon, Dragon remained in the shadows of Loguetown, his expression thoughtful. The storm began to dissipate, leaving the town in eerie silence. Smoker, still standing nearby, stared at Dragon with a mixture of frustration and unease.

“You interfered,” Smoker said bluntly.
Dragon met Smoker’s gaze without flinching. “The world is changing, and so is his fate,” he replied simply.

With that, Dragon turned and walked away, the echoes of his words lingering in the air. For Loguetown, it was a moment of mystery—one that would be remembered as the day Monkey D. Luffy narrowly escaped a Marine captain’s grasp and unknowingly crossed paths with the man who would one day reveal himself as his father.

Chapter 9: To Fight with Family

Summary:

“Everyone’s fighting. I won’t be the one who hides.” - Aiko
“You don’t know me. Why would you help?” - Vivi

Notes:

I'm really sorry that I didn't uploaded the next chapter last week. I'm going to send the chapter, that should have been uploaded last week today and the chapter this week, comes on friday.
I hope you like it.

See you on friday again.

Chapter Text

The storm in Loguetown had subsided, leaving an eerie calm in its wake. The Straw Hat Pirates, now back aboard the Going Merry, were ready to set sail for the Grand Line—a place of endless possibilities, unimaginable dangers, and the ultimate treasure.
The events in Loguetown, from Luffy’s near-capture by Smoker to Dragon’s mysterious intervention, had only strengthened the crew’s resolve.

 

On the deck of the Going Merry, Nami checked the navigation charts with her usual focus, plotting a precise course to reach Reverse Mountain—the entrance to the Grand Line. The winds were favorable, but the journey ahead would be anything but simple.

“Reverse Mountain, huh?” Usopp said, leaning over Nami’s shoulder as he tried to make sense of the map. “It sounds dangerous. Why does it have to be a mountain? Why can’t the entrance just be, I don’t know... flat?”

Nami shot him an unimpressed glare. “Because it’s the Grand Line. If it were easy to get to, it wouldn’t be legendary.”
Sanji appeared with a tray of freshly prepared snacks, his cigarette perched between his lips. “Nami-swan,” he said, setting the tray down with a flourish, “you’ve been working so hard. Here, have a refreshing drink.”

“Thanks, Sanji,” Nami replied, taking a glass without looking up. Usopp reached for a snack, but Sanji swatted his hand away. “Not for you, long nose!”

 

Meanwhile, Zoro sat cross-legged on the deck, sharpening his swords with quiet determination. The events in Loguetown had reignited his ambition, and the weight of his promise—to become the world’s greatest swordsman—hung heavily in the air.

Aiko, sitting nearby as she cleaned her own blade, glanced at him. “You’ve been at it since we left the dock,” she remarked. “What’s on your mind?”
Zoro didn’t look up. “Nothing special,” he replied. “Just thinking about Mihawk... and the next time we meet.”

Aiko nodded, understanding the intensity of his focus. She returned to her work, the quiet camaraderie between the two swordsmen speaking volumes without the need for words.

 

At the bow of the ship, Luffy sat cross-legged, grinning as the sea stretched endlessly before them. The salty breeze ruffled his straw hat, and his eyes sparkled with anticipation.

“We’re finally going to the Grand Line!” Luffy shouted, his voice ringing across the deck. “I can’t wait! That’s where all the adventures are waiting for us!”

“Don’t forget the dangers,” Nami called from the helm. “The Grand Line isn’t a place to mess around. It’s where the strongest pirates in the world gather.”
Luffy laughed, his carefree attitude unshaken. “That’s what makes it so exciting!”

 

As the Going Merry sailed toward Reverse Mountain, the crew settled into a temporary calm. Usopp tinkered with his latest invention—a pair of goggles he claimed would improve his aim tenfold. Sanji busied himself in the kitchen, preparing a feast to celebrate their departure from the East Blue.

Zoro and Aiko continued their quiet training, while Nami remained at the helm, her sharp eyes scanning the horizon.
It was during this peaceful moment that Luffy climbed onto the ship’s figurehead, balancing precariously as he gazed ahead. “I wonder what the Grand Line will be like,” he mused aloud. “Do you think we’ll find really big monsters? Or islands made of chocolate?”

Usopp’s eyes widened. “Monsters, sure, but chocolate islands? That’s crazy, even for you!”
“It’s the Grand Line,” Luffy replied with a grin. “Anything’s possible!”

Nami sighed. “What’s possible is that you’ll fall off the ship if you don’t get down from there.”

 

As the sun dipped toward the horizon, painting the sky in hues of orange and pink, the Going Merry sailed steadily toward Reverse Mountain. Each member of the crew was lost in their own thoughts, yet united by their shared dream of adventure.

“This is it,” Nami said, her voice carrying a mix of excitement and trepidation. “Once we reach Reverse Mountain, there’s no turning back.”
“That’s fine by me,” Zoro said, leaning against the mast.

“Me too,” Sanji added, flicking the ash from his cigarette. “The Grand Line’s where the real excitement begins.”
“Let’s go!” Luffy shouted, raising his fist to the sky. “We’re going to find the One Piece!”

The crew cheered, their voices ringing out over the open sea as the Going Merry sailed into the unknown.

 

The Going Merry cut through the calm waves of the open sea, its sails billowing as the wind carried the Straw Hats closer to their next great adventure: Reverse Mountain and the entrance to the Grand Line. On deck, the crew buzzed with a mix of excitement, nerves, and anticipation.

The vast expanse of the East Blue stretched behind them, a reminder of how far they had come—and how much further there was to go.

 

On the main deck, Luffy, seated cross-legged on the figurehead, pointed dramatically toward the horizon. “Reverse Mountain is going to be awesome! I bet it’s full of crazy monsters and treasure!”

Usopp, leaning against the mast with his arms crossed, furrowed his brow. “I don’t know... A mountain with a river going up sounds... unnatural. Are you sure this isn’t some kind of death trap?”

“It’s called the Grand Line for a reason, Usopp,” Nami quipped from the helm, her attention split between the navigation charts and the horizon ahead. “Nothing about it is normal. If you’re scared already, you might as well turn back now.”

“What?! Scared?!” Usopp puffed out his chest, pointing to himself. “As the brave warrior of the sea, I laugh in the face of danger!”
“More like run screaming,” Zoro muttered, reclining against a barrel with his arms behind his head. His comment drew a snicker from Sanji, who was busy peeling vegetables for dinner.

“Say that again, moss-head,” Usopp snapped, grabbing his slingshot.
“Don’t tempt me, long-nose,” Zoro replied, cracking one eye open.

Before the brewing argument could escalate, Nami’s voice cut through. “Would you all stop goofing around?! The Grand Line isn’t a joke!”

 

Sanji, now leaning against the galley’s doorframe with a cigarette hanging from his lips, exhaled a plume of smoke. “I’ve heard rumors about Reverse Mountain from the other cooks I met at sea,” he began, his tone casual. “The current shoots you up so fast, you might think the Merry’s about to fly.”

“That sounds amazing!” Luffy exclaimed, his grin stretching from ear to ear. “Flying ships! What if we actually go into the sky?”
“Let’s focus on not crashing first,” Nami interjected, rolling her eyes.

Usopp’s face paled slightly at Sanji’s comment. “Wait... so we’re going to be launched like a cannonball? Is the ship even built for that?!”
“Of course it is!” Luffy shouted confidently, giving the Merry’s mast a hearty slap. “Merry can handle anything. She’s the best ship ever!”

“Even the best ship can’t save us if the navigator doesn’t do her job,” Nami muttered, though a small smile tugged at her lips. Despite Luffy’s recklessness, his faith in the ship—and her abilities—never wavered.

 

As the day wore on, the crew found themselves gathered on the deck under the soft glow of the setting sun. The conversation turned to their dreams—a topic that came up often as they sailed toward the unknown.

“I’m going to find the All Blue,” Sanji declared, his cigarette balanced perfectly between his fingers. “A legendary sea where all the fish from every ocean gather... A cook’s paradise.”

“And I’ll become the world’s greatest swordsman,” Zoro added, his voice steady and certain as he rested his hand on the hilt of one of his swords. “No matter what it takes.”

“I’m going to chart the entire world,” Nami said, gazing at the map she was sketching. “To create the most detailed, complete map ever made.”
Luffy, sitting cross-legged near the mast with a piece of meat in hand, grinned widely. “And I’m going to be King of the Pirates!”

“What about you, Usopp?” Aiko asked, seated on a barrel with her sword resting across her lap. “What’s your dream?”

Usopp straightened up, placing a hand over his heart. “I’ll become a brave warrior of the sea, just like my father!” His voice was filled with conviction, though the faint tremble in his legs didn’t go unnoticed.

“And you, Aiko?” Nami asked, glancing over at her.
Aiko paused, her expression thoughtful. “I guess... I want to get stronger,” she said softly.

“Strong enough to protect the people I care about, no matter what.”
The crew fell into a comfortable silence, each of them lost in their thoughts as the Going Merry sailed steadily toward Reverse Mountain. The Grand Line was full of mysteries and dangers, but together, they were ready to face whatever lay ahead.

 

Just as the sun disappeared below the horizon, turning the sky a deep indigo, Nami’s sharp eyes caught movement in the distance. A dark shape moved across the water, barely visible against the fading light.

“What’s that?” she muttered, squinting at the horizon.
Luffy leapt to his feet, shading his eyes with his hand. “A sea monster? Or maybe a pirate ship!”

“It’s not a pirate ship,” Nami replied, her voice tense. “It’s moving too fast.”
Zoro stood, his hand on the hilt of his sword. “Whatever it is, it’s heading straight for us.”

The crew sprang into action, with Usopp scrambling to ready his slingshot and Sanji darting toward the galley to grab supplies. Aiko stood beside Zoro, her sword drawn and her eyes locked on the horizon.

As the shadow drew closer, the crew’s tension grew. The Grand Line wasn’t even in sight yet, but it seemed the dangers of the sea were already upon them.

 

The Going Merry sailed toward the massive Reverse Mountain, where a river flowing uphill marked the entrance to the Grand Line. The sound of roaring water grew louder with each passing moment, and the sight of the impossibly tall mountain left the crew awestruck—or in some cases, utterly terrified.

 

Sitting near the railing, Aiko hugged her knees to her chest. Her gaze darted between the rushing waves and the towering cliffs ahead. She chewed nervously on her lip, trying to shake the knot forming in her stomach.

“This is... this is really dangerous, isn’t it?” she murmured, though her voice was barely audible over the roar of the approaching current.
“Dangerous?” Usopp repeated, his own nervous energy bubbling over. “Dangerous doesn’t even begin to cover it! Look at that thing—it’s like a giant pirate-eating monster! We’re doomed!”

“Will you both relax?” Nami snapped from the helm, her grip on the wheel firm as she steered the ship. “If we don’t stay focused, we will crash.”
Aiko pulled her knees tighter to her chest, her voice trembling. “Maybe... maybe this wasn’t such a good idea. What if we don’t make it?”

“Don’t say that!” Luffy called from his perch on the figurehead, his grin as wide as ever. “We’re gonna make it, no problem! This is just the first step to finding the One Piece!”
Aiko glanced at him, her brow furrowing. “How can you be so sure?”

“Because we’ve got Nami steering, and Merry is strong!” Luffy declared confidently. “And besides, we’ve got each other!”
Aiko didn’t look entirely convinced, but she managed a small nod. “Right... each other.”

 

As the base of Reverse Mountain drew closer, the ship began to shake under the force of the current. Zoro leaned casually against the mast, his arms crossed and his usual calm demeanor unwavering.

“You don’t look scared,” Aiko said quietly, glancing at him.

Zoro opened one eye and looked at her. “Scared won’t help me swing my swords. You just focus on hanging on.”
Aiko hesitated, her grip on the railing tightening. “What if I mess up?”

“You won’t,” Zoro replied simply.
Nearby, Sanji emerged from the galley with a tray of snacks, cigarette dangling from his lips. “Here, Aiko,” he said, handing her a plate with a reassuring smile. “Eat something. You’ll need your strength if things get rough.”

Aiko took the plate with trembling hands but barely touched the food. “Thanks,” she murmured, her voice barely above a whisper.
“Relax, kid,” Sanji added. “We’ll get through this.”

 

The Merry hit the roaring current at the base of Reverse Mountain with a jolt. The ship surged forward, the water pulling it upward with incredible force. The roar of the river was deafening, and the cliffs on either side seemed to close in as they ascended.

“Hold on tight!” Nami shouted, her voice cutting through the chaos. “This isn’t going to be easy!”
Luffy laughed, throwing his arms into the air like he was on a thrill ride. “This is so cool! We’re flying!”

“We’re dying!” Usopp wailed, his hands wrapped around the mast in a death grip. “This is the end!”
Aiko clung to the railing, her knuckles white. Her breath came in short, shallow bursts as the ship tilted sharply. “I-I don’t think I can do this!” she stammered, her eyes wide with fear.

“You’re already doing it!” Nami yelled back, her tone firm but encouraging. “Just hang on! We need everyone alert!”
A Moment of Courage
As the Merry climbed higher, a massive boulder appeared in the river ahead, its jagged edges looming dangerously close. Aiko was the first to notice it, her instincts kicking in despite her fear.

“B-boulder! Ahead!” she cried out, her voice shaking but loud enough to be heard over the roar of the water.
Nami’s head snapped up, her eyes narrowing as she spotted the obstacle. “Good eye, Aiko!” she shouted, spinning the wheel to steer the ship clear.

The ship lurched violently to the side, narrowly avoiding the boulder as it rushed past. A spray of water drenched the deck, soaking Aiko and sending her scrambling to keep her footing.

Sanji appeared at her side in an instant, steadying her with a firm hand on her shoulder. “You okay?” he asked, concern flashing in his eyes.
Aiko nodded shakily, though her legs wobbled beneath her. “I-I think so. Did we... did we miss it?”

“Thanks to you,” Zoro said from his position at the bow. His voice was calm but carried a note of approval. “Nice work.”
Aiko blinked in surprise, then looked down at her trembling hands. “I... I didn’t really do much...”

“You spotted it before the rest of us,” Sanji pointed out. “That’s more than enough.”
A faint blush crept across Aiko’s cheeks, and for the first time since they’d approached the mountain, a small smile appeared. “Thanks,” she said softly.

 

The Merry crested the peak of Reverse Mountain, revealing the vast expanse of the Grand Line. The river split into four branches, each cascading down toward a different ocean. The view was breathtaking, filled with swirling clouds and distant islands that seemed to float on the horizon.

“We made it,” Nami said, her voice filled with relief.
“It’s incredible,” Aiko whispered, her awe momentarily overshadowing her fear.

“Look at all those islands!” Usopp exclaimed, his excitement returning. “We’re going to find so much treasure!”
At the figurehead, Luffy stood tall, his grin brighter than ever. “The Grand Line! This is where it all begins!”

 

But their celebration was cut short. As the ship began its descent, a dark shadow moved through the mist ahead. The roar of the ocean grew louder, and the air felt heavy with anticipation.

“What’s that?” Nami asked, her tone sharp.
Aiko’s hands trembled as she gripped the railing, but her voice was steadier now. “I don’t know... but it’s big.”

The mist parted slightly, revealing the massive silhouette of a sea creature. Its glowing eyes locked onto the Merry, and its enormous jaws parted as it let out a deafening roar.

Luffy grinned, stepping forward with his fists at the ready. “Looks like our first challenge in the Grand Line!”

 

After surviving the treacherous climb and descent of Reverse Mountain, the Straw Hat Pirates found themselves thrust into the vast, unpredictable waters of the Grand Line. The Going Merry sailed steadily through the misty expanse, and the crew began to relax after the chaos they’d just endured. But their relief was short-lived.

 

The calm waters ahead rippled unnaturally, and a deafening, mournful cry echoed across the sea. Suddenly, an enormous shadow emerged from the mist, towering over the Going Merry. The crew froze, their eyes widening in disbelief as the figure took shape.

“What is that?!” Usopp shrieked, pointing at the massive creature ahead.

“It’s a whale!” Nami exclaimed, gripping the helm tightly as she tried to steer the Merry away from the danger. “A huge whale—bigger than anything I’ve ever seen!”
The whale’s jet-black body was marked with scars, its sheer size dwarfing the ship entirely. It let out another deep, sorrowful cry that seemed to shake the very air.
“Cool!” Luffy shouted, his grin widening. “It’s so big!”

“Cool?!” Usopp wailed, clutching the mast with trembling hands. “It’s going to eat us!”
The whale, oblivious to the small ship in its path, moved closer, its massive eyes gazing at the Merry. Then, with a sudden shift, it opened its enormous jaws.
Into the Whale’s Mouth

Before the crew could react, the Merry was pulled toward the whale’s mouth. The giant creature seemed intent on swallowing them whole. Nami struggled to steer the ship away, but the current was too strong.

“We’re getting eaten!” Usopp screamed, hiding behind the mast.
“I won’t let that happen!” Luffy yelled, leaping onto the railing. “Gomu Gomu no—!”

But before he could attack, the ship was swallowed, disappearing into the darkness.

 

The crew found themselves inside the whale, surrounded by what appeared to be walls of flesh. The environment was eerie yet strangely calm, with faint sounds echoing through the enclosed space.
“Did we just get eaten?!” Usopp shouted, his voice panicked.

“Looks like it,” Zoro said calmly, leaning against the railing as though nothing unusual had happened.
“That’s it! We’re done for!” Usopp wailed, clutching his slingshot as though it could save him.

“Relax,” Aiko said softly, though her wide eyes betrayed her own nervousness. “We’re still together... that’s something, right?”
Luffy wandered to the edge of the ship, looking around curiously. “Hmm... I think there’s something weird about this place.”

The crew’s confusion deepened as they spotted a ladder leading to an opening in the whale’s wall. Without hesitation, Luffy grabbed the ladder. “Come on, guys! Let’s check it out!”

 

Following Luffy’s lead, the crew climbed the ladder and emerged into a surreal environment—an artificial sea complete with painted sky and land, all within the belly of the whale. Waiting for them was an elderly man with a grizzled appearance.

“Welcome,” the man said, his voice carrying a note of amusement. “I see you’ve met Laboon.”
“Laboon?” Nami asked, her brow furrowing.

The old man introduced himself as Crocus, the caretaker of the whale, and explained Laboon’s heartbreaking story. Laboon had been separated from the pirate crew he traveled with years ago, and he waited patiently in the Grand Line, hoping they would return.

“That’s so sad,” Aiko murmured, her voice trembling slightly.

“Laboon’s been through a lot,” Crocus continued, his tone softening. “And he’s still waiting.”
A Promise to Laboon

Moved by Laboon’s story, Luffy made an impulsive decision. He jumped up and punched Laboon’s massive head—not out of anger, but to get the whale’s attention.
“Hey, Laboon!” Luffy shouted. “We’re gonna go on an adventure in the Grand Line, and someday we’ll come back and see you! So stop hurting yourself waiting for those other pirates!”

Laboon let out a surprised cry, and the whale’s massive eyes seemed to light up. Luffy grinned, holding out his pinky. “Let’s make a promise!”
Laboon responded by gently pressing his head against the ship, and the Straw Hats smiled at the touching moment.

 

As the crew prepared to leave, Crocus gave them advice about navigating the Grand Line’s unpredictable waters, warning them of the dangers ahead. Laboon watched as the Merry sailed away, letting out a final, hopeful cry.

“We’ll be back, Laboon!” Luffy shouted, waving as the whale faded into the mist.
Aiko lingered near the railing, her gaze fixed on the massive creature. “I hope he finds peace,” she said softly, her voice almost drowned out by the chatter of her crewmates.

“He will,” Zoro replied, standing beside her. “Luffy doesn’t break promises.”
Aiko smiled shyly, her confidence bolstered by her growing bond with the crew. The Grand Line was full of unknowns, but together, they could face anything.

 

With their departure from Reverse Mountain behind them, the Straw Hats ventured deeper into the Grand Line, guided by their Log Pose. Their first destination, Whiskey Peak, promised a warm welcome to pirates, a rarity in the treacherous waters they now sailed. However, in the world of the Grand Line, appearances could be deceiving.

 

The towering cactus-like mountains of Whiskey Peak came into view, their spiked shapes casting eerie shadows over the sea. The late-afternoon sun bathed the island in a golden light, giving it an almost surreal beauty.

“What kind of mountains are those?” Usopp asked, leaning over the railing. “Are those really cactuses? They look weird.”
“They’re shaped like gravestones,” Zoro replied, his tone calm but ominous. His keen eyes scanned the island for any signs of danger.

Usopp gulped and inched back. “Gravestones?! Don’t say creepy stuff like that!”
“Quit whining!” Luffy shouted from the ship’s figurehead. His grin stretched from ear to ear, his excitement palpable. “This place is gonna be fun! I can smell the food from here!”

“It smells too good to be true,” Zoro muttered, crossing his arms as his instincts urged him to remain on guard.
“They’re just mountains,” Nami said, steering the ship toward the harbor. The Log Pose on her wrist pointed unwaveringly to Whiskey Peak, ensuring this was their destination. “Our priority is to restock supplies and get some rest. But don’t let your guard down. This is the Grand Line, after all.”

Seated quietly by the railing, Aiko hugged her knees and stared at the approaching island. Her wide eyes reflected her nervousness, though she spoke softly. “Do you think they’ll really be as welcoming as they seem?”

“That’s the problem,” Zoro said, glancing at her. “It seems too good to be true. Stay close to the crew.”
Aiko nodded, her fingers tightening around her sleeves. “Okay.”

 

As the Going Merry docked at Whiskey Peak’s harbor, a crowd of locals gathered on the docks, their smiles wide and their cheers boisterous. The townsfolk waved enthusiastically, calling out to the Straw Hats with welcoming words.

“Welcome, brave Straw Hat Pirates!” exclaimed Igaram, the flamboyantly dressed man who introduced himself as the town’s mayor. His voice was loud and exuberant, and his curly blonde hair seemed to bounce with every gesture.

“We’ve prepared a grand feast to celebrate your arrival! Whiskey Peak prides itself on being a haven for adventurers like yourselves.”

“This place is amazing!” Luffy exclaimed, practically bouncing on the deck in excitement. “Let’s eat!”
“They’re acting way too friendly,” Zoro muttered, his brow furrowing as he watched the overly enthusiastic crowd. “Something’s off.”

“Relax, moss-head,” Sanji said, lighting a cigarette as he stepped off the ship with his usual air of confidence. His eyes immediately locked onto a group of women in the crowd, and he flashed them a charming smile. “These lovely ladies are just being hospitable. Let’s not waste their efforts.”

“We’ll go along with it for now,” Nami said, her sharp eyes scanning the harbor for any signs of deceit. “But keep your guard up.”
The Straw Hats disembarked, following the cheerful townsfolk into the heart of Whiskey Peak, where an elaborate feast awaited them.

Long tables were laden with roasted meats, vibrant fruits, loaves of bread, and barrels of ale. Music filled the air, and laughter echoed through the town as the Straw Hats were encouraged to sit and enjoy.

 

Luffy dove headfirst into the food, devouring plate after plate with reckless abandon. “This is the best island ever!” he declared between mouthfuls.

Usopp, surrounded by a group of wide-eyed children, regaled them with exaggerated tales of his adventures. “And then I defeated a sea king with my bare hands! It was so big, it could’ve eaten the entire island!”

Sanji, ever the charmer, focused his attention on the women of the town, complimenting their beauty and basking in their giggles. “Ladies, you make this place a paradise.”

Even Nami allowed herself to relax slightly, sipping her drink as she observed the room with a calculating gaze. Yet, despite the cheerful atmosphere, her instincts kept her wary.

Zoro remained quiet, leaning against a wall with his swords within easy reach. His sharp eyes followed the movements of the townsfolk, noting the subtle glances and whispered exchanges.

At the far end of the table, Aiko sat quietly, her hands resting on her lap as she observed the celebration from a distance. The loud, lively atmosphere felt overwhelming, and the beaming faces of the locals unsettled her. She fidgeted with the hem of her sleeve, stealing glances at her crewmates.
“Not joining in?” Zoro asked, approaching her with his usual bluntness.

“I’m... trying,” Aiko replied softly, her voice barely audible over the noise. “It’s just... too loud.”
“Trust your gut,” Zoro said, lowering his voice. “Something’s not right here. Stay close.”

Aiko nodded, her lips curving into a small, grateful smile. “Okay.”

 

As the feast continued, the townsfolk’s cheerful facade began to crack. Zoro overheard a hushed conversation between two locals standing nearby.
“They’ll be asleep soon,” one whispered, glancing toward the Straw Hats. “Then we can finish the job.”

“They have no idea,” the other replied with a chuckle. “Another group of pirates, ripe for the taking.”
Zoro’s eyes narrowed. He stood abruptly, his hand on the hilt of his sword. His sharp voice cut through the noise of the celebration. “Enough pretending. What’s your plan?”

The room fell silent, and the townsfolk froze. Their smiles faded, replaced by sinister grins as they drew hidden weapons.
“You’re smarter than you look, swordsman,” said Miss Monday, a towering woman with immense strength who had been posing as a friendly local. “But it’s too late. Whiskey Peak is a hunting ground for pirates, and you’re just another group of fools who fell for our trap!”

 

The agents of Baroque Works revealed themselves, launching a coordinated attack on the Straw Hats. Zoro stepped forward, drawing his swords as he faced the oncoming attackers with calm precision.

“I’ll handle this,” he said coldly, moving like a whirlwind as he cut through the ranks of Baroque Works agents.

Luffy, not one to sit idle, joined the fray with his usual enthusiasm. “Gomu Gomu no Pistol!” he shouted, his stretchy punch sending several agents flying.

Sanji’s kicks landed with devastating precision, and Nami used her quick thinking to evade and outmaneuver her opponents. Even Usopp contributed, firing his slingshot at the attackers from a safe distance.

 

Amid the chaos, Miss Wednesday (revealed later to be Princess Vivi) and her partner, Mr. 9, attempted to confront the Straw Hats. Vivi wielded her peacock slashers, unique spinning blades, with agility and precision as she fought against Luffy.

“You’re strong,” Vivi admitted, her disguise as Miss Wednesday beginning to slip. “But you won’t defeat us!”
“You’re not bad either,” Luffy replied, grinning as he dodged her attacks effortlessly. “But we’re stronger!”

 

Amid the chaos, Aiko found herself face-to-face with one of the Baroque Works agents. Her hands shook as she gripped her sword, fear threatening to paralyze her. But as she watched her crewmates fight with unwavering determination, she drew a deep breath.

“I can do this,” she whispered, her voice barely audible. “I have to help.”

Her strikes were hesitant at first, but she managed to disarm her opponent, her movements growing more confident with each swing. The adrenaline coursing through her veins kept her moving, even as her heart raced.

“Well done,” Zoro said, glancing at her briefly as he dispatched another attacker. His tone carried a note of approval.
Aiko’s cheeks flushed, but she nodded, a determined smile crossing her face. “Thanks.”

 

As the battle ended and Baroque Works was defeated, Vivi revealed her true identity. Removing her disguise, she introduced herself as the Princess of Alabasta and tearfully explained her mission to stop Crocodile, Baroque Works’ leader, from destabilizing her homeland.

“My people are suffering,” Vivi said, her voice trembling. “I infiltrated Baroque Works to stop Crocodile, but I can’t do it alone.”
Moved by her plea, Luffy stepped forward with his usual confidence. “We’ll help you,” he said simply.

Vivi stared at him, stunned. “Just like that? You don’t even know me.”
“We don’t need to,” Luffy replied, grinning. “We’re friends now!”

 

With Vivi joining their crew, the Straw Hats set sail from Whiskey Peak, their next destination leading them closer to the heart of the Grand Line’s dangers. Aiko stood by the railing, watching the island fade into the distance.

“This is only going to get harder, isn’t it?” she asked softly

Chapter 10: Giants, Traps, and Straw Hats

Summary:

“And you didn’t,” Vivi replied. “You stood your ground and fought beside us. That’s what matters.”

“They’ve proven to be more troublesome than expected,” Crocodile mused.

Notes:

Next Week will be a break.

Chapter Text

With Whiskey Peak behind them, the Straw Hats ventured deeper into the Grand Line alongside their newest companion, Princess Vivi of Alabasta. The Grand Line’s unpredictable seas loomed ahead, and the crew quickly realized they weren’t out of danger yet.

Vivi’s revelation about Baroque Works—and its leader, Crocodile, one of the feared Seven Warlords of the Sea—gave new urgency to their journey. Their next steps would take them closer to Alabasta, but not before overcoming challenges that tested their strength, unity, and resolve.

 

The Going Merry sailed steadily across the choppy Grand Line waters, its crewmates gathered on the main deck to process what they had learned from Vivi. The Princess, sitting on a barrel near the mast, recounted the full story of her infiltration into Baroque Works. Her composure wavered as she described the suffering in her homeland.

“For years, Crocodile has manipulated Alabasta from the shadows,” Vivi said, her hands clenched tightly in her lap. “He’s using Baroque Works to spread chaos and misinformation. The people are starting to revolt against the royal family... against my father.”

Nami, seated nearby and leaning against the railing, folded her arms. “So Crocodile wants your kingdom to collapse, and then he swoops in and takes over?”
Vivi nodded solemnly. “Exactly. He’s pretending to be a hero to the people, but he’s the one causing their suffering.”

“Sounds like a coward,” Zoro remarked, sharpening one of his swords. His tone was blunt, but there was a glint of resolve in his eyes. “A Warlord or not, he’ll fall like anyone else.”

“But Crocodile’s not just strong,” Vivi warned, her voice trembling. “He’s smart. And Baroque Works has eyes and ears everywhere.”

 

Standing by the ship’s railing, Aiko listened quietly to Vivi’s story. She felt a pang of sympathy for the princess but couldn’t ignore the anxiety building within her. The idea of taking on an entire organization—and one led by a Warlord—was daunting.

Aiko approached Nami hesitantly, her voice soft. “Do you think... we can really do this? Crocodile sounds... impossible to beat.”
Nami turned to her with a small but confident smile. “Luffy doesn’t back down from a challenge. And neither should we. We’ve come this far together.”

Aiko nodded, her fingers fidgeting with the hem of her sleeve. “I’ll try.”

Sanji, overhearing the conversation, walked over and rested an encouraging hand on Aiko’s shoulder. “Don’t worry, Aiko. As long as you’re with us, nothing will happen to you. I’ll protect you and Princess Vivi with my life.”

Aiko’s cheeks reddened slightly, but she managed a small smile. “Thanks.”

 

Their conversation was interrupted by a sudden shift in the wind. The skies darkened, and the sea grew restless as a storm began to brew. Nami, already back at the helm, shouted commands to the crew.

“Get the sails tied down!” she ordered. “This storm came out of nowhere!”
“It’s the Grand Line!” Usopp wailed, scrambling to secure the rigging. “Everything here is trying to kill us!”

As the storm intensified, a shadowy figure emerged from the mist ahead. It was a ship—no, a fleet of small, aggressive-looking boats, each manned by figures in dark cloaks.

“More enemies?!” Luffy shouted, leaping onto the figurehead, his grin returning despite the danger. “Bring it on!”

 

The boats belonged to Baroque Works agents, dispatched to eliminate the Straw Hats after Vivi’s escape from Whiskey Peak. Armed with weapons ranging from rifles to cannons, they launched a coordinated assault on the Going Merry.

“Not these guys again,” Zoro muttered, drawing his swords.
“I’ll sink every one of their ships if it means protecting Vivi!” Sanji declared, already launching himself into battle with a devastating spin kick.

Luffy stretched his arms and punched a cannonball mid-flight, sending it hurtling back toward the attacking boats. “They’re not taking Vivi!” he roared.

As the Straw Hats defended the Merry, Aiko found herself standing near the bow. Her heart raced as one of the smaller boats approached, its crew preparing to board the ship. Her hands trembled, but she tightened her grip on her sword.

“Don’t freeze up,” she whispered to herself. “You can do this.”

 

When one of the Baroque Works agents jumped aboard, Aiko reacted instinctively. Her first swing was clumsy, narrowly missing her target, but her second strike landed, forcing the agent to retreat. Encouraged by the small victory, she steadied herself and adopted a more defensive stance.

Nearby, Zoro noticed her efforts and called out, “Good! Keep moving. Don’t let them corner you.”

Aiko nodded, her resolve growing. As another attacker lunged toward her, she ducked under their weapon and countered with a quick strike, disarming them. The adrenaline kept her focused, and despite her fear, she managed to hold her ground.

 

The battle was intense, but the Straw Hats’ teamwork proved unstoppable. Zoro’s swordsmanship, Sanji’s kicks, Luffy’s raw power, and Nami and Usopp’s quick thinking turned the tide. The remaining Baroque Works agents retreated, their boats disappearing into the storm.

As the rain began to let up and the skies cleared, the crew regrouped on the deck of the Going Merry. Luffy grinned triumphantly, stretching his arms behind his head. “That was fun! What’s next?”

“Fun?!” Usopp shouted, his face pale. “We could’ve died!”
Nami ignored the bickering and turned to Vivi. “This won’t be the last time they come after us.”

Vivi nodded solemnly. “I know. That’s why I’m counting on you all.”

 

As the crew began repairing the damage to the Merry, Aiko found a quiet moment to herself. She sat near the mast, staring at her sword. Her hands still trembled slightly, but there was a spark of pride in her eyes.

“You did well,” Zoro said, approaching her. His voice was calm but carried a rare note of praise.
Aiko looked up, surprised. “I... I didn’t think I could.”

“You didn’t freeze,” Zoro replied simply. “That’s the first step.”
Aiko smiled shyly, her confidence growing little by little. “Thanks.”

 

With the storm behind them, the Going Merry sailed onward. The next leg of their journey would take them closer to Alabasta, where new challenges—and powerful enemies—awaited. Vivi stood at the bow, the weight of her responsibility clear in her expression, but the unwavering support of the Straw Hats gave her hope.

“Alabasta’s still far away,” Nami said, consulting the Log Pose. “But we’ll get there.”

“And when we do, we’ll take down Crocodile!” Luffy declared, raising his fist. “No one messes with our friends!”
The crew cheered, their voices ringing out over the open sea as the Going Merry pressed forward into the unknown.

 

Having narrowly escaped the traps laid for them at Whiskey Peak, the Straw Hats now faced the vast and unpredictable sea of the Grand Line.

Their mission—helping Princess Vivi of Alabasta stop the sinister plots of Crocodile, one of the Seven Warlords of the Sea—loomed over their journey. Guided by their newly-acquired Log Pose, the crew found themselves sailing toward their next destination: Little Garden.

Though it was just a waypoint on their journey, the island’s name hinted at something deceptively quaint. The crew would soon discover that nothing about Little Garden was “little.”

 

It was an unusually calm day on the Grand Line, the kind that made the crew wary of what could lie ahead. On the open deck, Nami stood by the helm, her sharp eyes fixed on the Log Pose wrapped around her wrist. The needle pointed unwaveringly toward their next destination.

“According to the Log Pose,” Nami began, her tone matter-of-fact, “we’re headed to Little Garden. From what I’ve read, it’s a prehistoric island.”
“Prehistoric?!” Usopp exclaimed, dropping the knot he’d been tying. His gaze snapped to Nami, his face pale with fear. “You mean with dinosaurs? Giant monsters? You’re saying we’re about to sail into a land of nightmares?!”

“Dinosaurs?!” Luffy lit up like a child hearing about a candy store. He rushed to the ship’s figurehead, leaning forward as though the island might suddenly appear on the horizon. “That sounds awesome! I wanna fight a dinosaur!”

“Why is your brain like this?” Usopp shot back, incredulous. “Dinosaurs don’t want to fight you—they want to eat you!”
“Luffy’s not wrong,” Nami said, glancing toward the horizon. “Dinosaurs are probably the least of our problems on a place like this. If the creatures don’t get us, the environment might.”

“That’s reassuring,” Sanji quipped, exhaling a plume of smoke as he leaned against the railing. “But prehistoric island or not, I’m sure they’ll have something edible there.”

“Forget food, Sanji!” Usopp cried, his voice cracking. “We should be thinking about survival! How do you plan to fight off a 30-foot-tall monster?”
Sanji smirked, tapping the toe of his polished shoe against the deck. “With style, of course.”

Amid the banter, Zoro sat cross-legged near the mast, sharpening one of his swords with calm precision. He glanced toward the others, his expression unreadable. “It doesn’t matter what’s on the island,” he said, his voice steady. “We deal with it like we deal with everything else—head-on.”

 

Aiko, who had been sitting quietly by the railing, fidgeted with the hem of her sleeve as she listened to the conversation. The idea of a prehistoric island filled with enormous, dangerous creatures sent a shiver down her spine. Though she admired her crewmates’ bravery—or recklessness—her own fears felt impossible to ignore.
“Do we really have to go there?” she asked softly, her voice barely audible over the sound of the waves.

“Of course we do!” Luffy called back enthusiastically. “It’s part of the adventure! And we have to follow the Log Pose, right, Nami?”
“That’s how it works,” Nami confirmed. “Unless you want to be stuck here for years waiting for it to reset.”

“That’s not an option,” Zoro added bluntly. “We keep moving forward.”
Aiko glanced at Zoro, her hands tightening around the railing. His confidence was always so unshakable, so matter-of-fact. She wished she could feel that certain about anything.

“You’ll be fine,” Sanji said, walking over with a plate of freshly sliced fruit. He set it down beside her, flashing his usual charming smile. “Stick with us, and nothing on that island will even get close to you. I’ll make sure of it.”

Aiko managed a small smile, though her hands still trembled. “Thanks.”

 

When the ship reached the rocky shoreline, the crew took their first cautious steps onto Little Garden. The jungle loomed thick ahead, its towering trees casting long shadows that obscured the path forward. The ground was soft and damp, littered with leaves the size of blankets. Each breath the crew took was filled with the sharp, earthy scent of the prehistoric wilderness.

“I told you it’d be enormous!” Usopp exclaimed, his voice shaky as he gestured toward the massive plants and trees surrounding them. “Why are the leaves so big?! Why does everything feel alive?!”

“Because it is alive,” Nami said, scanning the area. “This island evolved differently. It’s like stepping into another time period.”
Luffy’s grin stretched wider as he darted ahead into the jungle. “Let’s go find the dinosaurs!” he yelled, his laughter echoing through the trees.

“Stop running off!” Nami shouted after him, her frustration spilling over. “Do you ever listen?!”
Sanji chuckled, shaking his head. “He’s going to give her an aneurysm one day.”

Aiko hesitated at the edge of the jungle, her sword resting at her side. The air felt heavier here, almost suffocating, as though the island itself was watching them. Every rustle in the leaves sent her heart racing, and the distant roar of a creature she couldn’t see made her grip tighten.

“You’ll get used to it,” Zoro said simply, passing by her with his usual calm. “Just stay close.”
Aiko nodded, stepping carefully into the jungle with the others.

 

As the crew ventured deeper into the jungle, they stumbled upon a sight that none of them could have anticipated. Two enormous figures towered above the treetops, their weapons gleaming as they clashed with thunderous force. Dorry and Brogy, giants from the legendary island of Elbaf, were locked in combat, their roars shaking the earth beneath their feet.

“Giants?!” Usopp shrieked, darting behind a tree. “Why are there giants here?! What kind of nightmare island is this?!”
“They’re so cool!” Luffy shouted, his excitement reaching a fever pitch. “I wanna fight them!”

“Typical,” Zoro muttered, though his hand moved instinctively to the hilt of his sword.
Aiko froze, her breath catching as she stared at the massive figures. Their sheer size was overwhelming, but there was something strangely awe-inspiring about them.

“They’re amazing,” she whispered, her voice trembling.
The giants paused their duel, their enormous heads turning to look at the newcomers. Dorry’s booming voice filled the clearing as he spoke. “Small ones! What brings you to Little Garden?”

“We’re here for adventure!” Luffy called back, waving eagerly. “You guys are amazing! Are you really from Elbaf?!”
Brogy laughed heartily, his voice rumbling like thunder. “Elbaf is our home! The mightiest warriors in the world come from there!”

Aiko stepped back nervously, her hand gripping her sword. She glanced at Zoro, whose calm demeanor hadn’t wavered.
“Don’t worry,” Zoro said to her, his tone steady. “They don’t seem hostile. Just stay alert.”

 

As the Straw Hats took in the sight of Dorry and Brogy, the legendary giants from Elbaf, the enormity of Little Garden’s mysteries began to sink in. The prehistoric island was not only home to dinosaurs and oversized plants—it was a land where even myths came alive.

The giants, intrigued by the Straw Hats’ presence, lowered their weapons and stepped closer. Each of their movements caused the ground to tremble, the sheer scale of their bodies making the crew feel even smaller than usual.

 

Dorry, the taller and bulkier of the two giants, sat down with a heavy thud that sent a shockwave through the clearing. He rubbed his beard thoughtfully before addressing the group.

“You’re not like the others who’ve come to this island before,” he said, his voice deep and resonant. “Most are either too afraid or too foolish to speak to us.”
“Afraid?!” Luffy shouted, shaking his head wildly. “We’re not afraid! You guys are amazing! You’re giants from Elbaf, right?!”

Brogy laughed heartily, resting his enormous axe on his shoulder. “Elbaf is the home of warriors! The strongest and bravest in all the seas!”
The mention of Elbaf made Usopp’s eyes widen, his fear momentarily replaced by awe. “You’re really from Elbaf?” he asked, stepping hesitantly from behind a tree. “That’s the village of giants! I’ve heard stories about the warriors of Elbaf—they’re supposed to be unstoppable!”

Dorry nodded, a proud smile spreading across his face. “We’ve traveled far from Elbaf. For a century, Brogy and I have dueled here on Little Garden, testing our strength and determination.”

“A hundred years?!” Aiko blurted, her wide eyes fixed on the giants. She hesitated before continuing, her voice softer. “Why would you fight for so long?”
“Why not?” Brogy replied, his tone lighthearted. “The clash of steel keeps us alive! Elbaf warriors never back down from a challenge!”

 

Despite the overwhelming size and presence of the giants, the Straw Hats were invited to join them for a meal. Around a roaring campfire, the giants prepared a feast of roasted dinosaur meat, its aroma filling the clearing.

Luffy dove into the food without hesitation, practically inhaling the chunks of meat. “This is the best thing ever!” he declared between bites.
Sanji examined the meat with a critical eye before taking a bite. “Not bad,” he admitted. “Surprisingly tender.”

Usopp, still nervous, poked at his portion cautiously. “This meat was probably bigger than a house before they cooked it.”
Aiko sat near the edge of the group, her hands resting on her lap as she glanced at the giants. She struggled to reconcile their warm hospitality with the sheer strength they had displayed moments earlier.

“You don’t eat much,” Dorry observed, his deep voice rumbling. “Afraid of giant food?”
“No!” Aiko replied quickly, startled by his question. She hesitated before adding, “It’s just... this whole place is overwhelming. I’ve never seen anything like it.”

“Few have,” Brogy said with a grin. “Little Garden is unlike any place in the world. You should count yourself lucky to see it.”
A small smile tugged at Aiko’s lips, and she nodded. “Thank you.”

 

As the group enjoyed their meal, danger lurked in the shadows. Mr. 3 and Miss Goldenweek, two agents of Baroque Works, observed the crew and the giants from their hidden vantage point. Mr. 3 adjusted his spectacles, his smirk growing as he watched the scene unfold.

“Two giants and a group of pirates,” he mused, his tone dripping with arrogance. “This will be quite the masterpiece.”
Miss Goldenweek remained silent, her paintbrush poised and ready.

Unknown to the Straw Hats, Mr. 3 had already set his plan into motion. Earlier, disguised agents had delivered a jug of ale to Dorry—one that had been rigged with explosives.

 

The tranquil moment around the campfire, filled with laughter and the warm camaraderie of the Straw Hats and the Elbaf giants, was abruptly shattered as Dorry lifted the suspicious jug of ale to his lips. His smile, so full of pride and joy just moments ago, vanished in an instant as a deafening explosion tore through the clearing.

The massive jug detonated violently, the force of the blast throwing Dorry backward like a fallen mountain. He collapsed with a resounding thud, the ground trembling beneath him as smoke billowed from his massive hands. The Straw Hats jumped to their feet, their faces a mix of shock and alarm.

“What was that?!” Aiko cried, instinctively gripping the hilt of her sword as her wide eyes darted toward Dorry. The force of the explosion had shaken her to her core, but the sight of the injured giant filled her with a new kind of dread.

Dorry groaned, struggling to prop himself up on one elbow. Despite the burns and cuts on his hands, the giant let out a pained chuckle. “It seems... fate has dealt me a blow in battle,” he said, his deep voice strained. “But a true warrior of Elbaf doesn’t complain about misfortune. It’s... just another test of strength.”

“That wasn’t fate,” Zoro said coldly, his sharp eyes scanning the jungle surrounding the clearing. His hand drifted instinctively to his swords as he added grimly, “That was sabotage. Someone did this on purpose.”

“Sabotage?” Nami asked, her voice rising with both confusion and fear. She glanced around the clearing, as though expecting the perpetrator to emerge from the shadows.

“This isn’t just Little Garden being dangerous,” Zoro continued, his voice calm but tense. “Someone planned this.”

The crew exchanged worried looks, the realization dawning on them all. This wasn’t an ordinary fight between giants or the natural hazards of the Grand Line—this was an attack.

“This was Baroque Works,” Vivi said quietly, her fists clenching at her sides. Her voice was laced with anger and fear. “They’re here. They’re after us.”

 

The weight of Vivi’s words hung in the air for only a moment before Luffy stepped forward, his usual carefree demeanor replaced with an intensity that made everyone pause. His fists clenched tightly at his sides as he glared at the jungle.

“Hey!” he shouted, his voice carrying like a roar. “Who did this?! Show yourself! If you’ve got a problem, come fight us!”

Luffy’s frustration and fury rippled through the group like an electric charge, reigniting their resolve. Even Usopp, who had instinctively backed away after the explosion, stood a little taller behind the others.

“I can’t believe someone would do this to Dorry,” Usopp muttered, shaking his head. “This is dirty—really, really dirty!”

 

As if in answer to Luffy’s challenge, a slow, mocking laughter echoed through the clearing. The sound, at once taunting and self-assured, sent a shiver down Aiko’s spine. Her grip on her sword tightened, and she took a step closer to Zoro, seeking reassurance in his calm presence.

The laughter grew louder, and from the shadows of the jungle stepped a man in a tailored suit. His appearance was neat and deliberate, with round spectacles perched atop his nose and an air of smug superiority clinging to him. Mr. 3, one of Baroque Works’ most cunning agents, had arrived.

“Well, well,” Mr. 3 began, his voice smooth and dripping with mockery. “The Straw Hat Pirates, Princess Vivi, and two giants from Elbaf. What an entertaining spectacle you’ve made here.”

“What do you want?!” Vivi demanded, stepping forward. Her voice was sharp and full of anger as she squared her shoulders, refusing to cower before the enemy.
“What I always want,” Mr. 3 replied lazily, gesturing with a dramatic flourish of his hand. “To capture you, dear Princess, and eliminate the rest of your pathetic crew. As for the giants...”

He glanced toward Dorry and Brogy, his smirk widening. “They’ll make excellent additions to my collection.”

 

Aiko took a step back as Mr. 3’s words sank in, the weight of the situation pressing down on her. This wasn’t a simple fight against a dinosaur or a wax soldier—this was an enemy who had planned their demise from the shadows.

“They’ve been watching us,” she whispered, her voice shaky as her gaze darted to Zoro. “They knew exactly when to strike.”
“And they’ll regret it,” Zoro replied, his tone steady and unwavering. “Stay close and don’t let your guard down.”

Aiko nodded, swallowing her fear. Despite the trembling in her hands, she tightened her grip on her sword. She wouldn’t freeze—not again.

 

Mr. 3 raised his hand, and streams of liquid wax poured from his fingertips, quickly solidifying into massive, faceless soldiers. The wax creations stood like statues for a moment before lurching to life, their blank faces turning toward the Straw Hats.

“Wax soldiers?!” Usopp yelped, his voice cracking. “Why is it always something weird?!”
“These guys don’t look so tough!” Luffy declared, his grin returning as he stretched his arms. “I’ll take them all down!”

“Don’t get reckless!” Nami shouted, pulling her Clima-Tact into position. “We don’t know what these things can do!”

As the wax soldiers charged, Luffy launched himself forward with a thunderous Gomu Gomu no Pistol, shattering the first soldier in a single blow. Sanji followed with a powerful kick that split another in two, while Zoro’s swords cut through the advancing wave with precision.

Amid the chaos, Aiko stayed close to Vivi, her heart pounding as she prepared to defend against any attack. When a wax soldier lunged toward them, Aiko swung her sword instinctively, striking its arm and forcing it back.

“You’re doing great,” Vivi said, her voice calm despite the chaos. “Just keep going.”
Aiko nodded, her determination growing with each swing of her blade.

 

While the Straw Hats battled the soldiers, Mr. 3 smirked from his position atop a massive wax dome he had created. “You’re putting on quite the show,” he remarked, adjusting his glasses. “But your struggle is pointless. My genius far outweighs your strength.”

From the other side of the clearing, Miss Goldenweek began painting colorful circles on the ground and trees, each hue carrying a hypnotic effect.
“That paint’s trouble!” Vivi warned. “Don’t step near it—it’ll manipulate your emotions!”

As the battle raged on, the Straw Hats began to feel the pressure of Baroque Works’ carefully laid trap. But even in the face of overwhelming odds, their determination burned brighter than ever.

 

The Straw Hats stood in the aftermath of Mr. 3’s assault, their breaths ragged and weapons in hand. The shattered remnants of Dorry’s trust, in the form of the destroyed jug, scattered the clearing. It was clear now: Baroque Works had planned this, and Mr. 3’s cunning traps went far beyond just wax creations. The battle was far from over, and the crew prepared themselves for the escalating storm.

 

The gleaming wax dome, shimmering like an unnatural fortress amidst the prehistoric jungle, loomed over the battlefield. Streams of wax continued to pour from Mr. 3’s fingers, forming new traps to snare the Straw Hats.

“What’s this guy’s deal with wax?!” Usopp yelled, narrowly dodging a tendril of hardened wax that lashed out toward him. “It’s everywhere!”
“This isn’t just wax,” Zoro muttered, his sharp gaze locked on Mr. 3. “It’s his Devil Fruit power. If we don’t take him down, these things will keep coming.”

“Let me at him!” Luffy shouted, his grin fierce as ever as he readied another attack. “I’ll smash that wax castle!”
“No!” Vivi called out, her voice sharp. “It’s a trap! If you rush in without thinking, we’ll all get caught!”

Luffy hesitated, growling under his breath. But just as he considered her words, more wax tendrils lashed out from the dome, this time ensnaring the injured Dorry. The giant groaned as the wax began to harden around his massive limbs, immobilizing him.

“They’re going after Dorry!” Vivi shouted, her voice filled with panic. “We have to stop them!”

 

As the wax began to creep further up Dorry’s body, Brogy, the other Elbaf giant, let out a roar of pure rage. His massive axe gleamed in the sunlight as he stormed toward the wax dome.

“HOW DARE YOU?!” Brogy bellowed, his booming voice shaking the very earth. “YOU DARE TO HARM MY BROTHER?!”

With a mighty swing of his axe, Brogy severed several wax tendrils in one strike, his eyes blazing with fury. But as he advanced, Mr. 3 smirked from his perch atop the dome, raising his hand lazily.

“You giants are so predictable,” Mr. 3 said mockingly. “Always charging in without thinking. It makes my work so much easier.”

With a flick of his wrist, Mr. 3 summoned more wax soldiers to block Brogy’s path. The massive figures, though small compared to the giant, moved with unnerving coordination, their blank faces eerily focused on their target.

 

As the crew fought to free Dorry and protect Brogy, Aiko found herself surrounded by a trio of wax soldiers. Her heart pounded as she raised her sword, sweat trickling down her brow. The pressure was almost overwhelming, but Zoro’s earlier words echoed in her mind: Trust yourself.

One of the soldiers lunged at her, its wax arm swinging with surprising speed. Aiko ducked low and countered with a quick upward slash, her blade slicing through the soldier’s torso. The figure shattered into jagged pieces of wax, but the next two soldiers pressed forward.

“Don’t freeze,” she whispered to herself, gripping her sword tightly. “Keep moving.”
Using her smaller size to her advantage, Aiko dodged and weaved between the attacks, striking when she saw an opening. Though her strikes were clumsy compared to Zoro’s precise movements, they were effective enough to take down another soldier.

Nearby, Vivi caught sight of Aiko’s efforts and called out, “You’re doing great, Aiko! Just keep going!”
The encouragement gave Aiko an extra boost of confidence, and she nodded, determined to hold her ground.

 

Amid the chaos, Sanji quietly slipped away from the main battle, his sharp eyes focused on the wax dome. He had noticed the way the tendrils flowed from the structure, all stemming from Mr. 3’s perch at the top.

“I’ll take out the source,” Sanji muttered to himself, lighting a cigarette. “Mr. Prince always has a plan.”

Moving swiftly and silently, Sanji climbed the base of the dome, avoiding detection as he approached Mr. 3. His steps were calculated, his usual flair tempered by the seriousness of the situation.

“Time to knock this guy down a peg,” he said with a smirk as he closed in.

 

While the crew battled the wax soldiers and defended the giants, Miss Goldenweek remained seated near the edge of the clearing, her calm demeanor unshaken. Using her paintbrush, she began laying more Color Traps across the battlefield, each one designed to manipulate the Straw Hats’ emotions.

“Watch out for the paint!” Vivi warned as she and Nami worked to disrupt the traps with water from the jungle. “If you step on it, it’ll control you!”

Despite their efforts, Luffy accidentally stepped onto a circle of red paint. His expression twisted with sudden, uncontrollable anger, and he began attacking wildly, his punches and kicks landing dangerously close to his own crewmates.

“Luffy, calm down!” Nami yelled, dodging a stray punch. “It’s the paint—it’s messing with your head!”

“We need to break the traps!” Usopp shouted, firing a slingshot pellet at Miss Goldenweek’s paintbrush. The shot missed, but it distracted her long enough for Vivi to splash water over the painted circles, smudging their effects.

As the colors faded, Luffy blinked, his usual grin returning. “I’m back!” he declared, cracking his knuckles. “Let’s finish this!”

 

With the Color Traps neutralized and the wax soldiers dwindling, the crew turned their attention to Mr. 3. From his perch atop the dome, the Baroque Works agent laughed, confident in his superiority.

“You think you’ve won?” Mr. 3 sneered. “You’re nothing but pawns in my masterpiece!”

But his confidence wavered as Sanji suddenly appeared behind him, delivering a powerful Collier Shoot that sent him stumbling forward.
“You talk too much,” Sanji said, exhaling smoke as he adjusted his tie.

Before Mr. 3 could recover, Luffy launched himself with his Gomu Gomu no Bazooka, his stretched arms slamming into the agent with tremendous force. The impact shattered the wax dome, sending Mr. 3 tumbling to the ground.

 

With Mr. 3 defeated and the wax dome reduced to shattered fragments, the giants Dorry and Brogy regrouped, battered but unbroken. Dorry, despite his injuries, stood tall, his laughter echoing through the clearing.

“A true warrior doesn’t back down from misfortune,” Dorry said, his voice tinged with pride as he clapped a massive hand on Brogy’s shoulder. “This was just another test of strength.”

Brogy grinned, his fury from the battle replaced with respect for the Straw Hats. “You’re small,” he said, his booming voice carrying warmth. “But you fight with the spirit of Elbaf warriors.”

“We’ll never forget your help,” Dorry added. “But the duel must go on.”

The Straw Hats exchanged smiles as the giants resumed their ancient battle, their weapons clashing with deafening force. Luffy cheered loudly, pumping his fists in excitement.

“You guys are awesome!” Luffy shouted. “Keep fighting forever!”

 

The crew made their way back through the dense jungle of Little Garden, the sunlight filtering through the towering trees as distant dinosaur roars reminded them that the island’s dangers were far from over.

Aiko, walking beside Vivi, glanced nervously over her shoulder. “Do you think Baroque Works will come after us again?” she asked softly.
“They won’t stop until they succeed,” Vivi replied, her voice steady but tinged with worry. “As long as I’m with you, they’ll keep coming.”

Aiko swallowed hard, her grip on her sword tightening. “Then we’ll just have to be ready.”
Nearby, Zoro overheard their conversation and added in his usual calm tone, “Whatever they send, we’ll handle it. Just focus on what’s ahead.”
Aiko nodded, the reassurance bolstering her resolve. “Right.”

As the jungle cleared and the sight of the Going Merry came into view, the crew breathed a collective sigh of relief. Sanji, walking slightly ahead, stretched his arms and smirked.

“Back to the ship,” he said, lighting a cigarette. “Hopefully, there’s something decent to eat on board.”
“Only if you’re cooking,” Usopp muttered, earning a chuckle from the others.

 

As the Straw Hats prepared to set sail, the atmosphere shifted. Though the battle with Mr. 3 was over, the presence of Baroque Works still hung heavily in the air. Unbeknownst to the crew, their actions on Little Garden had not gone unnoticed.

On a far-off Den Den Mushi line, a gravelly voice spoke. It was Crocodile, also known as Mr. 0, the leader of Baroque Works and one of the feared Seven Warlords of the Sea.

“So, the Straw Hat Pirates defeated Mr. 3,” Crocodile said, his tone calm but dangerous. “Interesting. They’ve proven to be more troublesome than expected.”
His underlings, seated around a lavish table in a grand room, exchanged nervous glances. “What should we do, Mr. 0?” one of them asked hesitantly.

Crocodile took a long drag from his cigar, the smoke curling around him like a serpent. “Let them come to Alabasta,” he said, his grin sharp and predatory. “We’ll end them there.”

 

As the Going Merry set sail from Little Garden, the crew settled into their usual routines, though the weight of their recent battle lingered. Luffy, ever the optimist, leaned against the ship’s railing, gazing out at the endless sea.

“That was fun!” he declared, grinning. “I hope the next island is just as exciting.”

“Can you take anything seriously?” Nami snapped, sitting near the helm as she studied the Log Pose. “We’re heading straight into a storm. The weather on the Grand Line doesn’t play fair.”

“She’s right,” Usopp added nervously, glancing at the dark clouds forming on the horizon. “We should be preparing, not daydreaming about dinosaurs.”
Aiko, seated near the mast, looked up at the sky, her brows furrowing. “It’s coming fast.”

“Then let’s not waste time,” Zoro said, his tone firm. “Everyone, to your positions.”

 

As the crew worked to secure the ship against the impending storm, Aiko found herself helping Vivi tie down some of the cargo. The princess offered her a small smile as they worked together.

“You’ve grown a lot,” Vivi said softly, her tone warm. “Back on Little Garden, I could see how much you’ve changed. You’re brave.”

Aiko blushed faintly, her fingers fumbling with the rope. “I was so scared,” she admitted. “But I didn’t want to let everyone down.”

“And you didn’t,” Vivi replied. “You stood your ground and fought beside us. That’s what matters.”

 

As the storm hit, the Going Merry was tossed by massive waves, the crew working frantically to keep the ship steady. The wind howled around them, and rain lashed against their faces as they pulled ropes and adjusted the sails.

“Hold on tight!” Nami shouted from the helm, her voice barely audible over the roar of the storm. “If we lose control, we’ll be in real trouble!”
“Trouble’s our middle name!” Luffy yelled back, his grin unwavering even as he helped secure the sails.

Amid the chaos, Aiko struggled to keep her footing as the ship lurched violently. Zoro, noticing her struggle, moved to her side, steadying her with a firm hand.
“Don’t let the storm shake you,” he said simply. “Just focus.”

Aiko nodded, her determination renewed as she held her ground.

 

As the storm finally began to subside, the crew regrouped on the deck, drenched but relieved. Nami, consulting the Log Pose, pointed to the horizon.
“The next island is close,” she announced. “We’ll reach it soon.”

Luffy’s excitement returned in full force. “Let’s go!” he shouted, pointing dramatically toward the horizon. “Adventure awaits!”

The crew laughed, their spirits lifting despite the challenges ahead. As the sun broke through the clouds, the Going Merry sailed steadily onward, the promise of Alabasta growing ever closer.

Chapter 11: Where Snow Falls, Hope Rises

Summary:

You’re not a monster. You’re just hurt.” - Aiko

“If I’m a monster, then why did she cry for me?” - Chopper

Notes:

I'm back guys :)
I hope you like this chapter. The next Chapter will come out next week.
See you guys next week :)

Chapter Text

The Straw Hats sailed onward from Little Garden, their resolve renewed but their bodies weary from the clash with Mr. 3 and Miss Goldenweek. The danger of the Grand Line had pressed itself upon them again, yet their journey to Alabasta was far from over.

The crew worked together to stabilize the Going Merry and take stock of the challenges ahead, while clouds brewed on the horizon—both literal and metaphorical.

 

As the Going Merry drifted on calmer waters, Aiko sat near the edge of the deck, staring out at the endless expanse of sea. Her sword rested beside her, but her focus was on the horizon. The events on Little Garden had left her introspective, her mind replaying the battle with Mr. 3’s wax soldiers and the moments when fear had threatened to consume her.

“You’re still thinking about it, aren’t you?” Vivi asked, approaching her quietly.

Aiko blinked, startled, before giving a small nod. “I keep wondering if I did enough,” she admitted softly. “I wasn’t as strong as the others.”

“You were strong enough,” Vivi said warmly, sitting beside her. “Strength isn’t just about power. It’s about standing your ground and fighting, even when you’re scared. And you did that.”

Aiko hesitated, then smiled faintly. “Thank you. I’ll try to remember that.”

 

At the helm of the ship, Nami studied the Log Pose intently, her expression a mix of concentration and worry. The needle, while steady, had begun to tremble faintly—a subtle but ominous signal that the Grand Line’s weather was shifting again.

“What is it, Nami?” Usopp asked, his voice laced with nervousness as he joined her at the wheel.

“The Grand Line’s getting ready to mess with us again,” Nami replied grimly, her sharp eyes scanning the horizon. “A storm’s brewing.”
Usopp gulped, his grip tightening on the railing. “A storm? How big?”

“Big enough to make things difficult,” Nami said. “Everyone needs to be ready.”

 

As dark clouds began to gather in the distance, Nami’s warning rang out across the deck. “Brace yourselves! The weather’s about to turn!”

The crew sprang into action, each member moving quickly to secure the ship. Sanji tied down loose barrels and crates, his cigarette dangling from his lips. Zoro, ever calm, adjusted the sails with precision, while Luffy and Usopp worked to secure the ropes and nets. Even Aiko, though still shaky, found herself helping to tie down the cargo alongside Vivi.

“This storm came out of nowhere,” Vivi said, her voice tense as she worked. “The Grand Line’s not letting us off easy.”
“It never does,” Zoro said simply, his tone steady despite the chaos.

Aiko, struggling to steady the barrel she was tying, felt the ship lurch beneath her feet as the waves grew taller. Her knuckles turned white as she gripped the rope tightly. “Don’t freeze,” she whispered to herself, echoing Zoro’s earlier advice.

 

Within moments, the storm arrived in full force. The sky darkened, and rain lashed against the deck as the Going Merry was tossed by massive waves. The wind howled, and lightning cracked across the sky, illuminating the ship in brief flashes.

“Hold the sails!” Nami shouted, her voice barely audible over the roar of the storm. “If we lose control, we’ll be thrown off course!”
“Everyone, grab something solid!” Usopp cried, clutching the mast tightly. “I don’t want to get thrown into the sea!”

Amid the chaos, Aiko struggled to keep her footing as the ship tilted sharply. Her heart raced, but before she could fall, Zoro appeared at her side, steadying her with a firm hand.

“Focus,” he said calmly, his grip steady. “You’ll be fine.”
Aiko nodded quickly, her fear giving way to determination. She worked alongside Zoro to secure the ropes, her movements growing more confident as she found her rhythm.

 

While the Straw Hats battled the storm, Crocodile, the leader of Baroque Works, was already preparing for their arrival in Alabasta. From his headquarters, he watched the rain pounding against the windows as he smoked his cigar, his mind calculating every step of his plan.

“They’ve escaped Little Garden,” Crocodile said, his voice a low rumble as he addressed his agents through the Den Den Mushi. “But they won’t make it much further.”
“What are your orders, Mr. 0?” asked one of his lieutenants, their voice tinged with nervousness.

Crocodile exhaled a plume of smoke, his grin sharp and predatory. “Let them come to Alabasta. But be ready. I want them crushed.”

 

When the storm finally subsided, the Straw Hats regrouped on the deck, drenched but relieved to still be afloat. The air was cool and calm, the storm’s fury replaced by an eerie stillness. Nami, still at the helm, glanced at the Log Pose and breathed a sigh of relief.

“It’s pointing us toward the next island,” she announced, her voice carrying both relief and determination. “We’re close now.”
“Finally!” Luffy cheered, jumping onto the railing with his usual enthusiasm. “Let’s go! I can’t wait to see what’s next!”

“Hopefully nothing that tries to kill us,” Usopp muttered, earning a laugh from Sanji.
Aiko, standing near Vivi, looked out at the horizon, her thoughts racing. Though the storm was behind them, the challenges ahead felt heavier than ever.

 

As the ship sailed steadily forward, the crew found quiet moments to reflect and recover. Aiko sat beside Vivi on the deck, her fingers tracing the worn hilt of her sword. The princess smiled gently, offering her a piece of bread from the kitchen.

“You’ve come a long way,” Vivi said softly. “When I first met you, you seemed so unsure of yourself. But now... you’re finding your place here.”
Aiko hesitated before accepting the bread. “It’s not easy,” she admitted. “But being with all of you makes it feel like I can do more than I thought I could.”

“You’re stronger than you realize,” Vivi said warmly. “And I’m proud to have you here with us.”

 

As the sun broke through the clouds, the crew gathered near the helm to hear Nami’s report. The Log Pose had stabilized, its needle pointing firmly toward their next destination.

“Alabasta is close,” Nami said, her tone serious. “But we don’t know what’s waiting for us there.”
Luffy clenched his fists, his grin sharp and determined. “We’ll be ready. Whatever happens, we’re not backing down.”

With Alabasta looming on the horizon and Crocodile’s plans in motion, the Going Merry sailed onward, carrying the Straw Hats and their growing resolve into the next chapter of their adventure.

 

The icy winds of the Grand Line swept over the Going Merry, blanketing the ship in a thin sheet of frost as it battled the restless seas. The Straw Hats had barely escaped Baroque Works, but victory was a distant thought now.

Nami, their navigator and guiding light through the Grand Line’s chaos, lay feverish and pale, her breaths shallow and weak. They needed help—a doctor, and fast. As tension filled the air, one member of the crew found herself feeling more helpless than ever: Aiko.

 

Aiko sat quietly near the railing, her hands resting on her lap and her eyes cast downward. The biting cold of the air felt distant compared to the ache in her chest as she listened to muffled voices coming from Nami’s cabin. Her mind raced, filled with worries she didn’t know how to voice aloud.

From inside the sick bay, Sanji emerged, his brow furrowed as he replaced the cold compress on Nami’s forehead. “Her fever’s only getting worse,” he muttered grimly, his voice carrying a rare urgency. “We can’t wait any longer. She needs a doctor.”

“We’ll find one,” Luffy said resolutely, standing up with a determined expression. Though his voice was firm, it was clear that even he wasn’t immune to the heavy atmosphere of the crew’s shared concern.

“You sure about that?” Usopp asked nervously, fidgeting with his slingshot as he paced the deck. “We don’t even know where to look. What if the next island doesn’t have a doctor?”

“Don’t start panicking,” Zoro said, his tone steady but sharp. “We’ll figure it out. We always do.”
Aiko glanced toward Zoro briefly, her voice barely above a whisper as she spoke. “But what if... what if we don’t?”

The question lingered in the air for a moment, but Zoro’s response was immediate, his tone blunt but not unkind. “Worrying about that won’t help anyone. Focus on what we can do.”

 

Before the conversation could continue, a shout from Usopp cut through the tension. “LAND HO!” he cried from the crow’s nest, his voice trembling with both excitement and relief.

The crew scrambled to the railing, their eyes scanning the horizon until the jagged silhouette of a snowy island emerged from the mist. Towering peaks stretched skyward, their summits hidden by thick clouds, while the faint glow of a village nestled at the base of the cliffs promised warmth and civilization.

“That’s it!” Luffy exclaimed, his energy surging back as he pointed toward the island. “There’s gotta be a doctor there!”
“Let’s hope so,” Vivi said quietly, her worry etched into every word.

Standing apart from the group, Aiko hesitated before speaking, her hands gripping the railing tightly. “It looks... lonely,” she said softly, her voice trembling. “Do you really think there’s someone who can help us?”

“Doesn’t matter,” Luffy replied, his determination cutting through her uncertainty. “We’ll find someone.”

 

The crew disembarked into knee-deep snow, their breaths visible in the freezing air as they trudged toward the village of Bighorn. The cold seemed to seep into their bones, but no one complained—the sight of the warm chimneys and flickering lanterns gave them hope.

As they entered the village, however, their excitement was met with suspicion. Armed guards blocked their path, rifles slung over their shoulders and expressions hard.

“What do you want?” the head guard demanded, his voice sharp and commanding.
“Our friend’s sick!” Luffy said immediately, stepping forward. “We need a doctor!”

The guard’s stern gaze softened slightly, but his grip on his weapon remained firm. “There’s only one doctor left on this island,” he said after a pause. “Dr. Kureha. But don’t expect her to come running. If you want her help, you’ll have to climb to the top of Drum Castle. She doesn’t leave the mountain.”

 

The guard’s words sent a chill through Aiko’s already trembling frame. Her eyes flickered toward the towering mountain, its icy peak shrouded in mist. “All the way up there?” she asked softly, her voice barely audible. “How can anyone even live in a place like that?”

“She’s eccentric,” the guard said with a shrug. “And stubborn. But she’s the best doctor you’ll find.”

Aiko tightened her grip on her scarf, her mind racing as she stared at the peak. The thought of climbing such a dangerous path filled her with dread. She opened her mouth to speak, then hesitated, her words faltering before they could form.

Luffy’s voice broke through her hesitation. “We’re going,” he said firmly, his usual confidence shining through. “She’ll help us.”

 

As Luffy and Sanji prepared to carry Nami up the mountain, the rest of the crew stayed behind to gather supplies. Aiko sat quietly near the edge of the group, her gaze fixed on the snow-covered ground. She felt torn between wanting to help and her growing fear of the unknown.

“You should stay here,” Zoro said as he approached her, his tone steady but direct. “That climb isn’t for you.”
Aiko glanced up at him, her shoulders tensing as she replied quietly, “I wasn’t going to go.”

“You’re scared,” Zoro said bluntly, earning a startled look from her. “Doesn’t matter. You’ll get your chance to help soon enough.”
“I just wish I could do something now,” Aiko murmured, her voice trembling. “But I don’t know how.”

Zoro studied her for a moment before responding. “Sometimes waiting is harder than fighting. But it’s just as important.”
Aiko nodded slowly, her fingers tightening around the edge of her scarf. “I’ll try.”

 

As Luffy and Sanji set off toward the mountain, carrying Nami carefully between them, Aiko watched their figures grow smaller against the snowy backdrop. Her heart felt heavy, but Vivi’s voice beside her pulled her from her thoughts.

“They’ll come back,” Vivi said gently. “Nami’s strong, and so are they.”
“I know,” Aiko replied softly, her voice tinged with uncertainty. “I just... hope it’s enough.”

“It will be,” Vivi assured her. “Sometimes hope is all we need.”

 

While Luffy and Sanji began the arduous climb toward Drum Castle, carrying Nami through the harsh snow and icy winds, the rest of the crew remained behind in the village of Bighorn. Though the villagers had offered basic shelter and supplies, there was little warmth in their attitudes.

Fear and mistrust clung to the air like frost, leaving the Straw Hats to piece together the island’s history on their own. For Aiko, the unease of being stranded in an unfamiliar place only deepened as night fell.

 

Aiko sat near the village square, bundled tightly in her cloak as she tried to ignore the stinging cold. Her eyes darted nervously between the villagers, who whispered among themselves and cast wary glances toward her and the rest of the crew. She hugged her knees to her chest, her thoughts racing.

“They’re scared of us,” Aiko whispered, her breath visible in the frozen air.
“They’re scared of everything,” Vivi replied softly, sitting beside her. “This island has been through a lot. Wapol ruled it with an iron fist before he was overthrown, and now they’re just trying to survive.”

Aiko nodded, though her unease didn’t fade. “I don’t blame them, but... I wish we could do more. It feels wrong to just sit here.”
“They need time,” Vivi said gently, placing a hand on Aiko’s shoulder. “And so do you. It’s okay to be scared.”

Aiko looked down, her fingers tightening around the edge of her scarf. “It doesn’t feel okay. Not when everyone else is so... capable.”
“You’re capable, too,” Vivi said firmly. “Even if you don’t see it yet.”

 

As Aiko and Vivi spoke, a flicker of movement at the edge of the forest caught Aiko’s attention. She turned quickly, her breath hitching as she spotted a figure darting between the snow-covered trees. It was small and fast, with a flash of something blue—a nose?—standing out against the white backdrop.

“Did you see that?” Aiko asked, her voice trembling slightly.
Vivi followed her gaze but saw only rustling branches. “What was it?”

“I-I don’t know,” Aiko stammered, standing cautiously. Her curiosity tugged at her despite her apprehension. “But... I think someone’s out there.”
Before Vivi could respond, Aiko took a hesitant step toward the forest. The snow crunched softly beneath her boots, and her breath grew shallow as she ventured closer to the tree line. “Hello?” she called, her voice barely above a whisper. “Is... someone there?”

For a moment, there was only silence. Then, a quiet voice replied, hesitant and unsure. “Stay back.”
Aiko froze, her heart pounding. The voice was high-pitched and trembling, yet there was something about it that felt... lonely. “We’re not here to hurt you,” she said gently. “We just want to help our friend. She’s really sick.”

From behind a tree, the figure stepped cautiously into the moonlight. Aiko gasped softly as she took in the sight: a small reindeer with a blue nose, standing upright like a human. His wide eyes darted nervously between Aiko and the edge of the village, his hooves twitching as if ready to bolt at any moment.

“Y-You’re lying,” the reindeer stammered, his voice tinged with fear. “Humans always lie. You’ll call me a monster.”
Aiko’s heart ached at his words. She raised her hands slowly, her movements careful and deliberate. “I won’t,” she said softly. “You’re not a monster. You’re just... different.”

The reindeer hesitated, his ears twitching. “Who... are you?”
“My name’s Aiko,” she said, her voice steadying. “And you?”

The reindeer paused before responding, his voice barely audible. “Chopper. Tony Tony Chopper.”

 

Aiko smiled faintly, though her hands trembled slightly from both the cold and her nervousness. “It’s nice to meet you, Chopper. We... we could really use your help.”
Chopper frowned, his uncertainty clear as he shifted his weight. “Why would you want my help? I’m just... I’m just a monster. That’s what everyone says.”

“You’re not a monster,” Aiko said firmly, her voice gaining strength. “You’re... amazing. You can talk, and you’re smart, and—” She hesitated, her cheeks reddening slightly. “And you’re kind enough to be here, even though you don’t trust us.”

Chopper’s eyes widened, and for a moment, his defenses seemed to waver. “You really think that?”
“I do,” Aiko said with a nod. “And our friend Nami—she’s really sick. If you or Dr. Kureha can help her... we’d be so grateful.”

Chopper hesitated, glancing back toward the forest as if weighing his options. Finally, he stepped a little closer, though he still kept his distance. “Dr. Kureha’s the one who can help. But... she doesn’t like strangers.”

“Please,” Aiko said, her voice soft but pleading. “We’ll do whatever it takes.”

 

Though still wary, Chopper lingered near the edge of the trees as he began to speak. His words were halting, and his eyes stayed fixed on the snow at his hooves as he recounted his life on the island. He spoke of his ability to transform, thanks to the Hito Hito no Mi, and how it had made him an outcast among both humans and reindeer. He described the ridicule, the loneliness, and the isolation that had followed him ever since.

As he spoke, Aiko listened intently, her heart breaking for the small reindeer. She didn’t interrupt, though her hands gripped her scarf tightly to steady herself.
“And then... I met Dr. Hiriluk,” Chopper said softly, his voice trembling. “He was... different. He didn’t care that I looked strange. He... believed in me.”

“What happened to him?” Aiko asked gently.
Chopper hesitated, his gaze dropping further. “He... he died. I couldn’t save him.”

Aiko’s breath hitched, but she forced herself to speak. “That... that wasn’t your fault, Chopper. I know it wasn’t.”
Chopper glanced at her, his expression filled with doubt and pain. “How could you know that?”

“Because...” Aiko paused, her voice trembling. “Because someone like you could never hurt someone on purpose. You tried to help him, didn’t you?”
Chopper nodded slowly, his eyes glistening with unshed tears.

“Then you did your best,” Aiko said softly. “And I think... he’d be proud of you.”

 

The snowfall on Drum Island grew heavier as the day wore on, blanketing the village in an eerie silence. Despite the biting cold and the tensions of the ongoing crisis, Aiko found herself standing near the treeline, her hands fidgeting nervously with the edges of her scarf.

She had always been quiet and cautious, but the fear that lingered in her chest now felt suffocating. Still, something deeper—something stronger—kept her rooted in place, waiting for the strange blue-nosed reindeer she had seen earlier. Tony Tony Chopper.

The villagers were inside, murmuring amongst themselves in tones of doubt and suspicion. Vivi and the other Straw Hats were securing supplies and planning their next move, but Aiko, despite her trembling hands and wary heart, had ventured toward the forest to see if Chopper would return. She hoped, and she worried.

 

The crunch of snow startled her out of her thoughts. She glanced up sharply, her breath visible in the cold air. Through the dense trees, a flicker of movement caught her eye—small hooves stepping cautiously into view. Her heart pounded as the blue nose of Chopper emerged, followed by his wide eyes filled with hesitation. He was standing upright, half-hidden behind the rough bark of a tree, his ears twitching nervously.

“You came back,” Aiko said softly, though her voice trembled. She tightened her scarf around her neck, trying to steady herself. “I wasn’t sure if you would.”
“You’re still here?” Chopper asked warily, his gaze darting between Aiko and the snow-covered village behind her. “Why?”

“Because I meant what I said earlier,” Aiko replied, her tone quiet but sincere. “We’re not here to hurt you.”
Chopper hesitated, his hooves shifting against the snow. “But... why would you want my help? I’m just a monster.”

Aiko blinked, her heart aching at the sadness in his voice. “You’re not a monster,” she said gently, shaking her head. “You’re... amazing.”
Chopper’s nose twitched, his wide eyes softening slightly. “You’re lying. Humans always lie.”

“I’m not,” Aiko said, her voice gaining a little strength despite the fluttering in her chest. “I think you’re incredible, Chopper. You can talk, and you can help people, and you’re kind... even though people haven’t been kind to you.”

 

The quiet wind rustled the branches overhead as Chopper stared at Aiko, his ears pinned back in uncertainty. For a moment, he seemed frozen in place, but eventually, his posture eased just slightly. He stepped forward hesitantly, the snow crunching under his hooves.

“You really think that?” Chopper asked, his voice barely audible.
“I do,” Aiko said firmly, though her cheeks reddened slightly. She hadn’t expected him to take her words seriously—or to step closer. “You’re amazing, Chopper. And I... wish I could be as brave as you.”

Chopper tilted his head, confused. “You’re scared?”
Aiko nodded quickly, her voice faltering. “I’m scared all the time. And right now, I’m scared that... that my friends might not make it through this. That we might not be able to save Nami. But you—you’re standing here, helping us, even though you don’t trust humans. That’s brave.”

Chopper blinked, his ears twitching. “I... don’t know if it’s brave. I just... don’t want anyone to feel like I did. Alone.”
Aiko felt her throat tighten, tears stinging the corners of her eyes. “Then that’s the bravest thing of all.”

 

Chopper shifted again, glancing down at his hooves. “I... wasn’t always brave,” he admitted quietly. “I used to hide all the time, after my herd kicked me out. Then I met Dr. Hiriluk.”

Aiko tilted her head, intrigued but careful not to press too hard. “Who was he?”

Chopper’s voice softened, carrying a mix of fondness and sorrow. “He was the only human who ever saw me as something more than a monster. He taught me about medicine, about helping people. And he had this crazy dream... He wanted to save Drum Island with his cherry blossoms.”

“Cherry blossoms?” Aiko asked, her brow furrowed.
“He thought that if people saw something beautiful—something they thought was impossible—it would give them hope,” Chopper explained. “He was always talking about miracles.”

Aiko smiled faintly, her fingers brushing against her scarf. “That sounds... wonderful.”
“He was wonderful,” Chopper said, his voice trembling. “But I couldn’t save him.”

 

Chopper hesitated before continuing, his gaze dropping. “He got sick. Really sick. And I wanted to help him, so I went into the wilderness and found what I thought was a cure—a rare mushroom. I gave it to him, thinking it would save his life.”

He paused, his ears drooping as his shoulders trembled. “But... it was poison. And he already knew he was going to die.”
Aiko’s heart sank, the weight of Chopper’s words pressing against her chest. She stepped closer, though she hesitated. “He... forgave you, didn’t he?”

Chopper nodded faintly, tears glistening in his eyes. “He smiled and told me I did great. But... I didn’t. I failed him.”
Aiko swallowed hard, her voice trembling as she said, “No, Chopper. You didn’t fail him. You gave him hope. You showed him how much you cared.”

“But he still died,” Chopper replied bitterly.
“Yes, but he died knowing someone loved him,” Aiko said softly. “That’s what matters.”

Chopper blinked, staring at her as though she had said something he couldn’t quite understand. “You really think... he was proud of me?”
Aiko nodded firmly. “I know he was.”

 

Before the conversation could continue, the sound of shouting echoed from the village. Aiko froze, her breath catching as she turned toward the commotion. Chopper stepped back instinctively, his ears twitching as the chaos grew louder.

“It’s Wapol!” someone shouted from the square. “He’s come back—with his men!”

 

Aiko’s heart raced as she looked at Chopper, fear bubbling in her chest. “What do we do?” she whispered.

Chopper hesitated, but then his ears perked up as determination flickered in his wide eyes. “We fight,” he said simply.
Aiko nodded, her hands trembling as she tightened her grip on her scarf. “Okay... We fight.”

 

The night sky above Drum Island grew darker as heavy snowflakes descended in a flurry, blanketing the village and muffling the sounds of conflict in the distance.

But the looming shadow of Wapol’s return cast fear across the island. Armed with cruel intentions and flanked by his loyal henchmen, the deposed king marched into the village square with arrogant confidence. His grotesque figure loomed over the villagers, who cowered behind the Straw Hats for protection.

For Aiko, the sight of Wapol was overwhelming—his imposing stature, his gloating laughter, and the force he commanded left her frozen with fear. Yet something deeper—a sense of duty and loyalty to the crew—kept her rooted in place. She tightened her grip on her scarf, her trembling fingers brushing against the hilt of her sword.

 

“I see this little rebellion didn’t last long!” Wapol sneered, his grin twisted as he spread his arms theatrically. “Did you really think you could throw me out of my own kingdom? Drum Island belongs to me—and I’ve come back to reclaim it!”

The villagers flinched at his words, some clutching each other in fear while others tried to retreat further into the shadows. But Luffy stepped forward, his posture steady despite the cold. His signature grin had turned into a fierce scowl, his determination palpable.

“You can’t take back something that doesn’t belong to you,” Luffy said bluntly, his tone firm and unwavering. “Leave this island, or we’ll make you.”
Wapol threw his head back in laughter, the sound grating against the snowy silence. “You’ll make me? You? A bunch of nobodies? Don’t make me laugh!”

“Nobodies with a purpose,” Zoro added, drawing one of his swords with a calm precision that made Aiko shiver. His confidence seemed effortless, but to Aiko, it felt almost unreachable.

“And nobodies who don’t back down,” Sanji said smoothly, lighting his cigarette as the cold wind carried the smoke into the air.

 

While the rest of the crew prepared to face Wapol’s forces, Aiko stayed close to Vivi, her legs stiff and her hands trembling. She wanted to move, to fight, to prove she wasn’t useless. But the fear that gripped her wouldn’t loosen its hold.

“What do we do?” Aiko whispered, her voice barely audible as she looked toward Vivi.

“We protect the villagers,” Vivi replied firmly, her own hands steady despite the tension in her expression. “Wapol’s men will try to hurt them first—that’s where we come in.”
Aiko nodded, her grip tightening on her scarf. “I... I don’t know if I can do this.”

“You can,” Vivi said gently, placing a reassuring hand on Aiko’s shoulder. “You don’t have to be perfect. Just try.”

 

Wapol’s henchmen surged forward, their weapons raised as they spread out across the village square. The Straw Hats sprang into action immediately, each member taking on a group of opponents with swift, coordinated movements. Luffy’s fists stretched and slammed into enemies with his usual ferocity, while Zoro’s swords cut through their ranks effortlessly. Sanji darted between attackers, his kicks landing with pinpoint accuracy.

Meanwhile, Chopper, who had returned from the forest to warn the Straw Hats about Wapol’s approach, joined the fray with remarkable agility. In his human form, he charged at the henchmen with surprising strength, using his newfound courage to protect the crew and the villagers.

 

Amid the chaos, Aiko found herself standing frozen near the edge of the square. She watched as Vivi moved quickly to shield a group of villagers, her movements decisive and sure. Aiko wanted to follow, to help, but the fear coursing through her veins left her rooted in place.

“You’re okay,” she whispered to herself, trying to steady her breathing. “You’re fine. You can do this.”

Suddenly, one of Wapol’s henchmen broke away from the main group, his eyes locked on Aiko as he advanced with a menacing grin. Aiko’s pulse quickened, her hands shaking as she reached for her sword.

“Stay back!” she shouted, though her voice cracked with panic.
The henchman laughed, raising his weapon. “You look scared. Let me make it worse for you.”

Aiko clenched her teeth, her grip tightening on her sword. She moved clumsily, her first swing missing entirely, but her determination to protect Vivi and the villagers pushed her forward. When the henchman lunged, Aiko swung again—this time, her blade connected, forcing him to stagger back.

“Good!” Vivi shouted from across the square. “Keep going, Aiko!”

Though her movements were still shaky, Aiko fought on, each strike gaining a little more confidence as she blocked the henchman’s blows and pushed him further back.

 

Near the center of the square, Chopper fought alongside Luffy and Zoro, his transformations into different forms proving invaluable. In his Walk Point, he darted quickly between enemies, landing swift hits and evading their attacks. In his Heavy Point, he delivered devastating blows, his strength surprising even Wapol’s elite forces.

“Chopper!” Aiko called out, her voice trembling. “Are you okay?”
“I’m fine!” Chopper shouted back, his ears twitching as he dodged another attack. “I... won’t let them win!”

Aiko nodded, her heart swelling with pride for the little reindeer. “You’re amazing,” she whispered, more to herself than to him.

 

After an intense battle, the combined efforts of the Straw Hats and Chopper forced Wapol and his forces to retreat. The village square was left scattered with defeated henchmen, their weapons discarded and their cries fading into the snowy night. Wapol, enraged but unable to gain ground, fled toward the path leading to Drum Castle.

Luffy watched him go, his grin returning. “He’s running now. Next time, we finish him.”
Zoro sheathed his swords with practiced ease. “If he makes it back to the castle, he’s going to be a lot harder to deal with.”

“We’ll be ready,” Vivi said confidently. “We’ll save Nami—and stop Wapol once and for all.”

Chapter 12: Between Winter’s Grasp and Desert’s Wrath

Summary:

“This country belongs to its people, not a tyrant like you.” – Vivi

“I don’t need to be fearless. I just need to move.” – Aiko

Notes:

Hi guys
I hope you like this chapter
The next chapter will come next Week :)

Chapter Text

As the crew regrouped, Aiko sat quietly near the edge of the square, her sword resting beside her as she tried to catch her breath. Though her heart still raced, a small sense of pride flickered within her—she had fought. It wasn’t perfect, but she had tried.

“You did good,” Chopper said suddenly, stepping beside her. His voice was quiet but steady, his ears twitching slightly. “You were scared, but... you didn’t give up.”
Aiko blinked, startled. “You noticed?”

“I know what it’s like,” Chopper said softly. “But sometimes trying is enough.”
Aiko smiled faintly, her hands brushing against her scarf. “Thank you.”

 

With the villagers safe, the Straw Hats turned their attention to the path leading up the mountain. Nami still needed urgent medical care, and Dr. Kureha awaited them at Drum Castle. Though the climb would be treacherous, the crew’s determination had only grown stronger.

“I’ll guide you,” Chopper offered hesitantly, glancing at Aiko. “It’ll be dangerous, but... I’ll help.”
“We’re ready,” Luffy said with a grin. “Let’s go!”

As the crew set off toward the towering peak, Aiko lingered beside Vivi, her steps slower but steady. Though she was still nervous, her connection with Chopper had given her a small spark of courage she hadn’t felt before.

“We’ll make it,” Vivi said softly.
Aiko nodded, her fingers brushing against her scarf again. “We have to.”

 

The snowy winds of Drum Island grew harsher as the Straw Hats prepared for the arduous climb to Drum Castle. Nami’s worsening condition drove their urgency, her pale complexion and fever a constant reminder of the stakes. With Chopper guiding them, the crew braced themselves against the cold, knowing the path ahead was fraught with danger—not only from the treacherous mountain, but also from Wapol, who had fled toward the castle after his retreat from the village.

For Aiko, the prospect of climbing the icy peak filled her with both fear and determination. Though her hands still trembled and her movements were hesitant, the bond she had begun to forge with Chopper gave her a small spark of courage. It wasn’t much, but it was enough to move her forward.

 

As the crew left the village behind, the path to Drum Castle stretched before them like an endless challenge. The snow was deep, forcing them to trudge slowly, and the biting wind whipped against their faces, making every step feel heavier than the last.

“Stay close,” Chopper said cautiously, glancing back at the group as he led the way. His hooves left small tracks in the snow, a visible guide through the storm. “The wind gets worse the higher we go.”

“This cold is brutal,” Usopp muttered, hugging himself tightly as he shivered. “Why couldn’t the doctor live somewhere easier to reach?”
“She lives here for a reason,” Vivi replied, her voice steady despite the icy air. “This isolation keeps her safe—and keeps Wapol away.”

“Well, it’s not keeping him away now,” Sanji said, his tone sharp. “We need to reach her before he does.”
Luffy grinned, his determination breaking through the tension. “We’ll get there. We just have to keep going!”

 

Walking near the back of the group, Aiko found herself struggling to keep up. The snow seemed to pull at her feet, making each step feel like an impossible effort. Her breathing grew heavier, and she wrapped her scarf tighter around her face to block out the wind.

“Are you okay?” Chopper asked, glancing back at her with a concerned expression. His ears twitched as he stopped to wait for her.
“I... I’m fine,” Aiko replied quickly, though her voice trembled. She glanced at Vivi, hoping for reassurance. “Just... trying to keep up.”

“You’re doing great,” Vivi said with a small smile, her tone gentle. “It’s not easy, but you’re strong enough for this.”
Aiko nodded, her cheeks reddening. “Thanks,” she murmured, her fingers brushing against her scarf for comfort.

 

As the group climbed higher, the path narrowed, forcing them to move single file along the icy trail. The sound of the wind was deafening, and loose snow occasionally cascaded from the cliffs above, making the terrain even more treacherous.

“Watch your step!” Chopper warned, his voice carrying over the howl of the storm. “The snow here hides ice—it’s slippery.”
True to his warning, Usopp nearly lost his footing, his arms flailing as he grabbed onto the cliffside. “Why does everything in the Grand Line have to be a death trap?!”

“You’ve got this, Usopp!” Luffy shouted encouragingly, his usual grin returning despite the cold. “Don’t let the snow beat you!”
“Easy for you to say,” Usopp grumbled, pulling himself back onto the path.

Aiko hesitated as she approached the same icy patch, her legs stiffening with fear. The thought of slipping and falling made her heart race, but the sound of Chopper’s voice broke through her panic.

“Step where I stepped,” Chopper said gently, pointing to the tracks he had left. “It’s safer.”
Aiko nodded quickly, her breath visible in the freezing air. She followed Chopper’s tracks carefully, her steps small but steady. Though her pulse remained quick, a small sense of relief washed over her as she passed the dangerous spot.

“You did it,” Chopper said with a faint smile, his ears twitching. “See? You’re stronger than you think.”
Aiko’s cheeks reddened again, but this time from a flicker of pride. “Thanks,” she whispered.

 

As the group continued their climb, the sight of Drum Castle finally emerged through the storm. Its towering structure loomed above the snowy cliffs, a fortress of ice and stone. But the sight was accompanied by something far more ominous—the faint sound of voices ahead, growing louder with each step.

“That’s him,” Zoro said grimly, his hand moving instinctively to his swords. “Wapol’s already here.”
“Then we don’t have time to waste,” Vivi said urgently. “We need to reach Dr. Kureha—now.”

“Leave Wapol to me!” Luffy declared, his grin sharp and determined. “We’ll stop him for good!”

 

Despite her nerves, Aiko felt a spark of resolve as Wapol’s presence came closer into view. The fear she carried didn’t disappear, but it shifted—replaced by the need to protect her crew, her newfound friend Chopper, and the villagers who had placed their trust in them.

“We can do this,” Vivi said softly, stepping beside Aiko. “You can do this.”
Aiko tightened her grip on her scarf, her breath steadying. “Okay,” she said quietly. “Let’s go.”

 

The storm raged around the Straw Hats as they neared the looming structure of Drum Castle. The towering fortress stood as an imposing silhouette against the dark sky, its icy walls glistening in the moonlight. The howling wind carried the faint but unmistakable sound of voices and heavy movement—Wapol and his forces were already ahead, their intentions clear. Nami’s life and the safety of the island hung in the balance.

 

When the crew finally reached the base of Drum Castle, the narrow, icy path gave way to an open plateau. The large gates of the fortress loomed before them, partially opened, with faint light spilling out into the snowy night. But standing between them and the gates was a group of Wapol’s remaining henchmen, armed and ready to block their way.

“Looks like we’ve got company,” Zoro muttered, his hand already resting on the hilt of his sword.
Sanji exhaled smoke from his cigarette, his breath mixing with the frosty air. “I’d say they’re not looking to chat.”

“Perfect,” Luffy said with a grin, stepping forward. “We’ll just knock them out of the way!”

The henchmen sneered and raised their weapons, emboldened by their numbers. “You think you can take us all on?” one of them shouted. “You’re just a bunch of pirates!”

“That’s the idea,” Sanji said smoothly, adjusting his tie. “But it’s not gonna end the way you think.”

 

Aiko remained at the back of the group, her legs stiff as she stared at the menacing figures blocking the way. Her fingers clutched the edges of her scarf tightly, and though she tried to steady her breathing, the cold air felt heavier with each inhale.

“They’ll handle the worst of it,” Vivi said quietly, stepping beside her. “Just stay close to me, and we’ll make it through.”
Aiko nodded hesitantly, her voice barely above a whisper. “I... I’ll try.”

“You’ve already done so much,” Vivi added gently. “You don’t have to fight like them to make a difference.”
Aiko glanced down, her grip on her scarf loosening slightly. “I just want to help,” she murmured. “Even if I’m scared.”

“You are helping,” Vivi said with a reassuring smile. “And being scared doesn’t mean you’re not brave.”
Aiko swallowed hard, her cheeks reddening as she gave Vivi a small nod. She stepped closer to her, trying to draw strength from her presence.

 

Without hesitation, Luffy launched himself at the enemy, his fists stretching and swinging with incredible force. “Gomu Gomu no Pistol!” he shouted, his attack slamming into the first group of henchmen and sending them flying.

Zoro followed closely behind, his swords flashing in the dim light as he sliced through the enemies with precision and ease. Meanwhile, Sanji moved like a whirlwind, his kicks landing with devastating power as he disarmed and disabled the henchmen one by one.

From the edge of the battlefield, Chopper watched in awe, his ears twitching nervously. He shifted between his Brain Point and Heavy Point forms, ready to jump in if needed. Though he was still hesitant to trust entirely, the Straw Hats’ unrelenting teamwork and courage inspired him.

“They’re... amazing,” Chopper whispered, his gaze lingering on Luffy.
“They don’t stop,” Aiko added softly, her voice filled with a mix of wonder and anxiety. “Even when it’s scary, they just... keep going.”

Chopper glanced at her, his ears perking slightly. “You’re staying here, even though you’re scared. That’s... strong too.”
Aiko blinked, startled by his words. “I... I don’t feel strong.”

“You are,” Chopper insisted, his voice firm despite his usual timidness. “Standing here when you want to run—that’s strong.”
Aiko’s cheeks reddened, but a small, determined smile flickered across her face. “Thank you,” she said quietly.

 

As the last of the henchmen fell, a slow clap echoed from within the gates. Wapol stepped into view, his grotesque figure silhouetted against the warm light from the castle interior. His twisted grin and confident posture made the air feel heavier.

“Well, well,” Wapol sneered, spreading his arms theatrically. “Look who made it all the way up here. You’ve been quite the nuisance, Straw Hats.”
Luffy stepped forward, his eyes narrowing. “We’re not letting you hurt anyone else.”

“Hurt?” Wapol laughed mockingly. “This is my island! Everything on it belongs to me! And that includes that so-called doctor you’ve come to see.”
“She doesn’t belong to you!” Chopper shouted suddenly, his voice trembling with anger as he stepped forward. “You don’t own this island, and you don’t own her!”

Wapol blinked, surprised by the outburst. Then his grin widened cruelly. “Ah, the monster speaks. How cute. Maybe I’ll make you part of my personal collection.”
“You’re not taking anyone,” Luffy said sharply, his fists clenching. “Let’s end this.”

 

The fight broke out with ferocity as Wapol and his remaining forces attempted to push back the Straw Hats. Luffy charged at Wapol head-on, his rubbery attacks clashing with the tyrant’s bulk. Zoro and Sanji handled the remaining henchmen with precision, their movements a seamless dance of strength and skill.

Chopper, despite his nervousness, joined the fray with newfound determination. In his Heavy Point form, he landed powerful strikes that sent henchmen sprawling, while his Walk Point allowed him to dart quickly between attacks.

 

Though she remained at the edge of the battlefield, Aiko didn’t stay idle. She worked alongside Vivi to guide the villagers out of the line of fire, her hands trembling as she gestured for them to follow.

“Go that way!” she urged, her voice shaking but firm. “You’ll be safe behind the cliffs.”

One of the villagers hesitated, their eyes wide with fear. “Why are you helping us?” they asked. “You don’t even know us.”

Aiko swallowed hard, her grip tightening on her scarf. “Because it’s the right thing to do,” she said quietly, her voice gaining strength. “And because... I know what it’s like to be scared.”

Though her movements were clumsy and her fear lingered, Aiko’s determination carried her through. Each small action—guiding a frightened villager, blocking an incoming strike—brought her closer to understanding her own strength.

 

After an intense battle, Wapol was finally forced to retreat, his forces broken and his pride shattered. The villagers, though shaken, began to emerge from their hiding places, their expressions filled with gratitude.

“You did it,” one of them said, their voice trembling. “You saved us.”
“No,” Luffy said with a wide grin. “We all did.”

As the crew caught their breath, Chopper stepped forward hesitantly, his wide eyes focused on Aiko. “You were... really brave,” he said softly.
Aiko blinked, surprised. “I-I didn’t do much,” she stammered.

“You helped them,” Chopper insisted, gesturing to the villagers. “That’s enough.”
Though her cheeks reddened, Aiko smiled faintly. “Thank you, Chopper. You were... amazing too.”

 

With Wapol defeated, the crew turned their attention back to their original goal: reaching Dr. Kureha and saving Nami. Chopper, though still hesitant, guided them into the castle, where the warmth of the doctor’s quarters awaited them.

As they stepped inside, the weight of the battle began to lift, replaced by the hope of healing and the promise of a new ally.

 

The heavy wooden doors of Drum Castle creaked open, revealing a stark contrast between the frigid storm outside and the warm, glowing interior.

The crew stepped inside, carrying Nami carefully on her stretcher, her pale face a reminder of how little time they had left. The fortress was grand yet rugged, with walls of stone and a crackling fire roaring in the central hearth. Dr. Kureha, the eccentric but renowned doctor of Drum Island, stood waiting with a confident smirk, her sharp eyes assessing the ragged group.

“You look like you’ve been through the wringer,” she remarked, her voice tinged with amusement. “I assume this one here is the patient.”
“She’s really sick,” Sanji said, his tone unusually urgent. “Please, help her.”

Dr. Kureha’s gaze softened as she approached Nami, her experienced hands already at work. “Set her down. I’ll take care of her, but it’s not going to be quick or easy.”

 

The crew watched anxiously as Dr. Kureha examined Nami, her movements precise yet calm. Chopper, standing nervously at the edge of the room, occasionally stepped forward to assist, handing over tools and ingredients without needing to be asked.

“Is she going to be okay?” Luffy asked, his usual energy tempered by the worry in his voice.

“She will be,” Dr. Kureha replied without looking up. “But she’ll need time to recover. This fever could have been deadly if you hadn’t brought her to me when you did.”
A collective sigh of relief swept through the group, though the tension in the air remained. Aiko, standing near the back with her scarf clutched tightly around her neck, exhaled shakily. “She’s going to be okay,” she whispered to herself, her shoulders relaxing slightly.

“You all did well to get her here,” Dr. Kureha continued, her tone softening slightly. “But don’t think this means you can relax. Drum Island has more challenges waiting for you.”

 

While Dr. Kureha worked, Aiko noticed Chopper hovering near the doorway, his usual nervous energy evident in the way his hooves fidgeted against the floor. Gathering her courage, Aiko approached him quietly, her steps slow and hesitant.

“Chopper?” she said softly, her voice barely audible over the crackle of the fire.
He glanced at her, his ears twitching. “What?”

“You... you were amazing out there,” she said, her cheeks reddening slightly. “I don’t think we could have made it without you.”
Chopper looked away, his nose twitching. “I just did what I had to. I’m not like you guys—I’m not strong like that.”

Aiko shook her head quickly, her grip tightening on her scarf. “You’re wrong. You’re the strongest person I’ve ever met.”
His wide eyes flickered toward her, a mix of surprise and disbelief in his gaze. “Why would you say that?”

“Because... even when you were scared, you still helped us,” Aiko replied, her voice trembling slightly. “You trusted us, even though you didn’t have to. That’s real strength.”

Chopper’s ears perked up, and for a moment, the vulnerability in his expression faded into something softer—something hopeful. “You’re weird,” he muttered, though there was no malice in his tone.

Aiko smiled faintly, her cheeks reddening further. “Maybe. But I mean it.”

 

Hours passed as Dr. Kureha worked tirelessly to stabilize Nami’s condition. The crew took turns keeping watch, their exhaustion evident but their spirits buoyed by the hope of her recovery. Aiko, though still quiet and reserved, found herself sitting closer to the others, drawing strength from their unwavering camaraderie.

Finally, as the first light of dawn broke through the stormy sky, Nami’s eyes fluttered open. The color had begun to return to her cheeks, and though she was weak, her voice was steady.

“Where... am I?” she murmured, her gaze drifting across the room.
“You’re safe,” Luffy said immediately, his grin wide with relief. “Dr. Kureha fixed you!”

Nami managed a faint smile, her eyes meeting his. “You didn’t... do anything reckless, did you?”
“Of course not,” Luffy said, though his tone wasn’t entirely convincing.

 

As the crew celebrated Nami’s recovery, Chopper stood at a distance, his wide eyes watching the scene unfold. There was a longing in his gaze, a mix of admiration and hesitation as he observed the bond between the Straw Hats.

“You should go with them,” Dr. Kureha said suddenly, her voice cutting through the quiet.
Chopper flinched, his ears twitching. “What are you talking about?”

“They’re your kind of people,” Dr. Kureha replied, her tone firm yet kind. “They see you for who you really are—and they value that.”
“I... I don’t know,” Chopper stammered, his hooves fidgeting against the floor. “What if they don’t really want me?”

Aiko, who had been sitting nearby, stood and approached him cautiously. “We do want you,” she said softly. “You’re part of this now.”
Chopper’s gaze flicked to hers, his wide eyes filled with doubt. “But... what if I mess it up? What if I don’t belong?”

“You already belong,” Aiko said firmly, her voice steady despite the nervous flutter in her chest. “You’ve saved us—again and again. You don’t have to be perfect to be part of something.”

Chopper stared at her for a long moment, his ears twitching. Finally, he sighed, a small smile tugging at the corners of his mouth. “You’re really weird,” he said again, though this time his tone was almost teasing.

Aiko smiled back, her cheeks reddening. “Maybe. But I mean it.”

 

As the crew prepared to leave Drum Island, Chopper hesitated at the gates of Drum Castle, his small frame dwarfed by the towering structure. He glanced back at Dr. Kureha, his expression torn.

“Are you sure I should go?” he asked, his voice quiet.

Dr. Kureha crossed her arms, her smirk softening into a fond smile. “You’ve learned everything you can here. It’s time to find your place in the world, Tony Tony Chopper.”

With a deep breath, Chopper turned back to the crew. Luffy grinned, holding out a hand. “Let’s go, Chopper! Adventure awaits!”
Though his steps were hesitant at first, Chopper finally moved forward, his ears twitching nervously but his eyes filled with determination. Aiko, walking beside him, gave him a reassuring nod.

“You’re one of us now,” she said softly. “And we’ll always have your back.”

Chopper smiled shyly, his nose twitching as he stepped onto the Going Merry for the first time. The warmth of the crew surrounded him, melting away the cold of the storm as they set sail toward their next adventure.

 

As the Going Merry sailed away from the icy shores of Drum Island, the warmth of camaraderie filled the ship despite the chilly breeze that followed them. Chopper, the crew’s newest member, stood cautiously near the edge of the deck, his wide eyes scanning the endless waves surrounding them.

Though his steps were hesitant and his ears twitched nervously, there was an undeniable spark of curiosity and excitement in his expression. For the first time, he was part of something bigger—a crew that saw him as more than just a “monster.”

 

Sitting on a crate nearby, Aiko watched Chopper with a small smile. Though she felt nervous herself, she couldn’t help but feel proud of the little reindeer’s choice to join them. She tightened her scarf around her neck and gathered her courage before speaking.

“It’s... different, isn’t it?” she said softly, her voice barely audible over the sound of the waves.
Chopper turned his head, his ears twitching. “What?”

“Being out here,” Aiko continued, her gaze shifting to the horizon. “With people who care. It’s... scary at first. But it’s worth it.”
Chopper hesitated, his hooves fidgeting against the wooden deck. “Do you really think I belong here? I don’t feel... strong enough.”

“You do belong,” Aiko said firmly, though her voice trembled slightly. “You’re stronger than you think, Chopper. You’ve already saved us so many times—and now we get to help you too.”

Chopper’s nose twitched, his wide eyes softening as he met hers. “You... really believe that?”
“I do,” Aiko replied, her cheeks reddening. “You’re one of us now.”

 

As Luffy bounded across the deck with his usual enthusiasm, he paused when he saw Chopper lingering near the railing. “Chopper!” he shouted, waving dramatically. “Come over here! We’ve got stuff to plan!”

“Stuff to plan?” Chopper asked, tilting his head.
“Yep! Adventures!” Luffy declared, his grin wide. “You’re part of the crew now, which means you get to help decide where we go next!”

“You mean that?” Chopper asked hesitantly, his ears twitching.
“Of course!” Luffy said, slinging an arm around him without hesitation. “You’re our doctor! You’re super important!”

Chopper blinked, surprised by Luffy’s sincerity. For a moment, his nervous posture softened, and he allowed himself to smile. “Okay. I’ll... I’ll do my best.”

Nearby, Nami, who was still recovering but strong enough to sit with the crew, offered a smile of her own. “Welcome to the crew, Chopper,” she said warmly. “We’re lucky to have you.”

 

As the crew buzzed around Chopper, discussing their next plans and sharing stories, Aiko remained seated near the edge of the deck. Her fingers brushed against her scarf as she watched the scene unfold. Though she didn’t always know how to voice her feelings, she felt something she hadn’t felt in a long time—a sense of belonging.

“You did good,” Zoro said suddenly, his calm voice pulling her from her thoughts. He leaned against the mast nearby, his arms crossed. “With Chopper, I mean.”
Aiko blinked, startled by the unexpected comment. “I-I didn’t do much,” she stammered.

“You’re wrong,” Zoro replied, his tone blunt but not unkind. “Sometimes words matter more than swinging a sword. You gave him the push he needed.”
Aiko’s cheeks reddened, and she glanced down at the deck. “I was just... trying to be honest.”

“That’s the point,” Zoro said simply, his gaze shifting to the horizon. “Don’t underestimate yourself.”

 

As the sun began to set, casting warm hues across the sky, Nami sat up from her spot near the helm, her Log Pose glowing faintly on her wrist. “The next island is coming into range,” she announced, her voice steady despite her lingering exhaustion. “It’s close.”

“What’s it called?” Luffy asked eagerly, his excitement bubbling over.
Nami frowned slightly as she checked her map. “It’s Alabasta.”

Vivi’s expression shifted immediately, her gaze sharpening. “That’s my homeland,” she said, her voice filled with urgency. “We need to hurry. Crocodile won’t wait.”
The crew exchanged glances, their playful energy giving way to a renewed sense of purpose.

“We’ll stop him,” Luffy said, his fists clenched. “No matter what.”

 

As the crew prepared for their journey to Alabasta, Aiko stood beside Vivi near the helm, her scarf fluttering in the breeze. Though her nervousness remained, she felt a growing determination to face what was ahead.

“You’re brave,” Aiko said quietly, her gaze fixed on Vivi. “Going back to stop him after everything he’s done.”
“I have to be,” Vivi replied, her tone steady. “For my people.”

Aiko nodded, her fingers brushing against her scarf for comfort. “I’ll... do my best too.”
“You already are,” Vivi said with a gentle smile. “And we’ll do this together.”

Aiko’s cheeks reddened, but a small, determined smile flickered across her face. “Okay.”

 

As the Going Merry sailed through calmer waters, the oppressive heat of the desert kingdom began to take hold. The crew had left behind the icy winds of Drum Island and now faced the scorching sun as they approached Alabasta. For Vivi, the sight of her homeland brought a mix of relief and dread—relief at finally being close enough to intervene, and dread at the thought of what might await them in the heart of the rebellion.

The crew gathered at the bow of the ship as the coastline came into view. The golden sands stretched endlessly, and the harsh glare of the sun reflected off the dunes. Alabasta’s arid beauty was undeniable, but the tension in the air was palpable.

 

“We’re finally here,” Vivi said, her voice steady but tinged with urgency. She stood at the front of the group, her gaze fixed on the shoreline. “Thank you... all of you, for coming this far.”

“It’s not over yet,” Zoro said, his tone calm but resolute. “Crocodile’s not going to make this easy.”
“He can try,” Luffy said confidently, his grin returning as he clenched his fists. “But we’re gonna stop him.”

“I just hope we’re not too late,” Vivi murmured, her fingers tightening around the edges of her cloak.
Standing beside her, Aiko offered a small but supportive smile. Though her voice trembled slightly, she said, “We’ll... do whatever it takes. You’re not alone.”

Vivi glanced at her, a faint smile breaking through the worry on her face. “Thank you, Aiko. That means a lot.”

 

As the ship drew closer to the shore, Chopper peeked cautiously over the railing, his ears twitching. “It’s... so hot,” he said, his wide eyes scanning the seemingly endless desert. “How does anyone live here?”

“It’s a challenge,” Vivi replied. “The people here are strong—but Crocodile has taken advantage of the drought. He’s turned the people against my family and used their desperation to fuel the rebellion.”

Chopper’s nose twitched, his usual nervousness replaced by quiet determination. “Then we’ll stop him. I... won’t let him hurt anyone else.”
Luffy grinned at him, slapping a hand on Chopper’s shoulder. “That’s the spirit! You’re gonna love it here, Chopper. Adventure everywhere!”

“Adventure?” Chopper echoed, tilting his head. His nerves began to ease slightly, a small smile forming. “I... guess that doesn’t sound too bad.”

 

As the ship anchored and the crew prepared to disembark, Aiko hesitated near the mast, her scarf fluttering in the breeze. Though she had grown more confident since their time on Drum Island, the thought of confronting Crocodile and entering a land on the brink of war made her hands tremble.

“You’re thinking too much again,” Zoro said, his voice cutting through her thoughts. He leaned casually against the railing, his swords glinting in the sunlight.
“I’m not... I mean, maybe I am,” Aiko admitted, her cheeks reddening. “I just... don’t want to mess up.”

“You won’t,” Zoro said simply. “Just keep moving forward. That’s all you have to do.”
Aiko blinked, his blunt reassurance settling in her chest. Though she still felt nervous, she nodded slowly. “Okay. I’ll try.”

 

The crew set foot on Alabasta’s sandy shores, the heat hitting them like a wave. Nami shielded her eyes from the glare, her recovering strength evident in the way she carried herself. Luffy, undeterred by the heat, bounded ahead, his grin as wide as ever.

“This place is amazing!” he exclaimed, his enthusiasm undiminished by the harsh climate. “Let’s go!”
“Slow down, Luffy,” Nami called after him, her tone exasperated. “We need to plan first.”

“Yeah,” Usopp added, already sweating. “We can’t just charge in without a plan. This place looks dangerous.”

Nearby, Vivi scanned the horizon, her sharp gaze picking out the faint outline of a distant town. “That’s where we’ll start,” she said, pointing. “The town of Nanohana. We can gather supplies and learn more about what’s happening there.”

“And Crocodile?” Zoro asked.
“He’ll be further inland,” Vivi replied. “His headquarters, Rainbase, is closer to the desert’s heart. But we’ll need to be cautious. His influence is everywhere.”

 

As the crew began their trek across the sands, Chopper struggled to adjust to the harsh environment. The heat was overwhelming, and the loose sand made every step feel twice as difficult. Aiko, noticing his discomfort, slowed her pace to walk beside him.

“Are you okay?” she asked softly, her own voice shaking slightly from the heat.
“It’s... really hard,” Chopper admitted, his ears drooping. “I’ve never been anywhere like this before.”

“Me neither,” Aiko said, offering him a small, encouraging smile. “But we’ll figure it out together.”
Chopper blinked, his wide eyes filled with a mix of surprise and gratitude. “Thanks, Aiko. I’ll... try my best.”

 

As the sun began to set, the crew reached the outskirts of Nanohana, the town bathed in a warm orange glow. Though the streets bustled with activity, there was a noticeable tension in the air—a sense of unease that lingered beneath the surface.

“We need to stay low,” Vivi warned, her voice hushed. “Baroque Works has spies everywhere. If they recognize me, we’ll be in trouble.”
The crew exchanged glances, their playful energy giving way to quiet resolve. They knew the challenges ahead would test them like never before, but their bond—and their shared determination—gave them strength.

As they entered the town, Aiko lingered at the back, her eyes darting nervously between the shadows. Though her fear still lingered, she took a deep breath and tightened her grip on her scarf. She wasn’t sure what lay ahead, but she knew one thing: she would face it with the crew beside her.

Chapter 13: Fire and Fists

Summary:

"Even the strongest flames flicker in fear... but they never die." – Aiko

"Brothers don’t need the same blood to burn the same fire." – Ace

Notes:

See you next Week :D
Enjoy this new Chapter.

Chapter Text

Under the relentless sun of Alabasta, the port city of Nanohana hummed with life and tension. Merchants lined the streets, loudly advertising desert gear and scarce water supplies. Townsfolk hurried through the chaotic marketplace, their nervous glances betraying the unease that gripped the kingdom. For the Straw Hats and Vivi, the bustling activity offered fleeting anonymity as they moved carefully through the streets, but it also served as a stark reminder of Crocodile’s oppressive hold over Alabasta.

Among the crowd, Aiko walked quietly alongside Chopper, her scarf pulled tightly around her face to shield her from both the heat and her growing apprehension. It wasn’t just the climate that felt overwhelming—the weight of their mission pressed heavily on her shoulders. Though the crew had faced countless dangers before, the thought of confronting Crocodile, a Warlord of the Sea, felt almost insurmountable.

 

The marketplace was loud and alive, but beneath the surface of bustling commerce, the cracks in Alabasta’s unity were painfully clear. Merchants argued over dwindling supplies, their voices rising above the hum of the crowd. Men and women whispered in hushed tones about the rebellion and the drought, their words heavy with anger and suspicion. Marines moved through the streets in tightly knit patrols, their watchful eyes scanning for threats as tensions simmered on the edge of eruption.

“Look around,” Vivi said softly, her gaze sweeping the crowd. “This isn’t just a city. It’s a kingdom on the brink. Crocodile has shown distrust everywhere.”

“We’re gonna fix it,” Luffy said brightly, his grin unshakable as he bounded ahead, earning exasperated glances from Nami and Zoro. “We’ll take him down and make everything right!”

“Can you slow down for once?” Nami scolded, grabbing Luffy’s arm and pulling him back toward the group. “We’re supposed to be keeping a low profile.”

“You’re both loud,” Zoro muttered, his tone even as he surveyed the streets with caution. “You’re attracting attention.”

 

While the crew pushed forward, gathering supplies and discussing their next steps, Aiko found herself trailing slightly behind. The heat of the desert and the overwhelming noise of the city threatened to pull her further into her thoughts. She adjusted her scarf, her fingers brushing against the fabric as if searching for reassurance.

“Are you okay?” Chopper asked gently, his wide eyes filled with concern as he glanced up at her.

Aiko hesitated, her gaze shifting to the crowded streets ahead. “I’m... nervous,” she admitted, her voice barely audible. “Everyone seems so sure of what to do, but I... I don’t know if I can.”

“You don’t have to be perfect,” Chopper replied softly, his tone filled with quiet encouragement. “You’re here, and you’re helping—that’s already brave.”
Aiko’s cheeks reddened, and she managed a faint smile. “Thanks, Chopper. I’ll keep trying.”

 

As the crew moved further into the marketplace, the mood shifted. A sudden commotion erupted from the crowd as townsfolk scattered, creating a wave of chaos that rippled through the streets. Loud shouts echoed above the marketplace noise, followed by the heavy thud of boots and the clang of weapons.

“Marines!” Vivi hissed, her sharp eyes darting toward the source of the disturbance. “They’ve found someone.”

Amid the chaos, the figure at the center of the commotion emerged. Moving swiftly through the crowd, he vaulted over market stalls and dodged Marine patrols with ease. Flames flickered behind him as he created bursts of fire to block his pursuers, the intense heat forcing them to halt.

“What’s going on?” Usopp asked nervously, clutching his slingshot as he scanned the scene.

“That guy... he’s good,” Zoro muttered, his gaze narrowing as he studied the figure’s movements.

 

The man landed smoothly in the center of the square, the force of his arrival kicking up sand and smoke. As the dust settled, he straightened and adjusted the wide-brimmed hat perched atop his head, his smirk radiating confidence. Shirtless and dressed in an open orange vest, his muscular frame bore the tattoo of the Whitebeard Pirates boldly across his back.

Raising his hand, the man summoned flames that danced along his fingertips, their brightness cutting through the desert haze. The Marines hesitated, their weapons trembling as they faced the overwhelming heat. The man tilted his head slightly, his smirk widening.

“You sure you want to do this?” he said casually, his tone carrying an air of amusement.

Before the Marines could respond, the man unleashed a fiery attack, sending flames sweeping across the square. The intensity of the heat forced the patrol to scatter, their formation breaking under the sheer force of the fire.

“He’s... incredible,” Nami murmured, her eyes wide.
“Definitely not ordinary,” Zoro muttered, his hand inching toward his swords.

Suddenly, Luffy’s face lit up with recognition, his grin growing wider. “Ace!” he shouted, his voice cutting through the chaos as he dashed toward the man without hesitation.

 

The fiery figure—Portgas D. Ace, Fire Fist Ace—turned at the sound of his name. His smirk softened into a warm grin as Luffy barreled toward him, nearly tackling him to the ground.

“Luffy,” Ace said, steadying himself. “It’s been a while.”

“What are you doing here?!” Luffy asked eagerly, his words tumbling over each other. “Are you looking for me?”

Ace chuckled, his casual demeanor unwavering. “Not exactly. I’m hunting someone—a man named Blackbeard. He betrayed my crew, and I’ve been tracking him across the Grand Line.”

As the rest of the crew approached cautiously, Ace tipped his hat to them. “Portgas D. Ace,” he said smoothly. “Luffy’s older brother.”

The Straw Hats stared in disbelief. “Brother?!” Usopp exclaimed, his jaw dropping. “You never told us you had a brother!”

“You never asked!” Luffy replied brightly.

 

Before the reunion could continue, the Marines regrouped and charged forward again. Ace sighed, his flames reigniting effortlessly. “Guess I’ll handle this quickly,” he said, raising his hand.

“Hiken (Fire Fist)!” Ace shouted, sending another fiery wave across the sand. The Marines retreated in defeat, their formation shattered by the overwhelming force of Ace’s attack.

As the commotion died down, Ace turned back to Luffy and the crew. “You’re heading deeper into Alabasta, aren’t you?” he asked, his grin returning. “Taking on Crocodile?”

“Yes,” Vivi said firmly, her voice steady. “Crocodile is tearing this kingdom apart, and we have to stop him.”

“Then I’ll stick around for a bit,” Ace replied casually. “Sounds like you could use some firepower.”

 

As the group set off into the desert, Aiko walked alongside Chopper, her thoughts still lingering on Ace’s fiery display. “He’s... really strong,” she said softly, her scarf fluttering in the breeze.

Chopper nodded, his wide eyes filled with awe. “Do you think we’ll ever be that strong?”

Aiko smiled faintly, her grip on her scarf loosening. “Maybe. If we keep moving forward.”

 

Far ahead in Rainbase, Crocodile sat in his office, the news of Ace’s arrival already reaching him. He exhaled a cloud of smoke, his grin sharp and calculating.
“Fire Fist Ace,” he muttered. “Let’s see if his flames burn out in this desert.”

 

The desert heat was unrelenting as the Straw Hat Pirates, joined by Portgas D. Ace, pressed onward. The stillness of the golden sands seemed ominous, as if the desert itself was holding its breath. Every step deeper into Alabasta brought them closer to Rainbase, where Crocodile’s sinister plans continued to unfold, but each step also tested their endurance and camaraderie.

 

Ace walked beside Vivi, his relaxed yet commanding presence standing in contrast to her tightly wound resolve. Though the crew had grown used to Ace’s calm energy, Vivi couldn’t help but notice the quiet intensity in his eyes.

“You care a lot about this kingdom,” Ace began, breaking the silence. “It’s not easy to stand against someone like Crocodile. You’re brave to do this.”
Vivi nodded, her lips tightening. “It’s not about bravery. It’s about responsibility. If I don’t stop him, no one will.”

Ace admired her determination, but his gaze softened. “Responsibility can weigh you down, especially when it feels like the world’s against you. You’ve got a solid team here—lean on them.”

For a moment, Vivi faltered, caught off guard by Ace’s insight. She glanced at her crewmates, who carried on despite the desert’s challenges, and her grip on her cloak loosened. “Thank you,” she said quietly, finding some comfort in his words.

 

The group stopped briefly to rest under the meager shade of a large rock formation. Sanji, ever the resourceful cook, busied himself with rationing their dwindling supplies. He handed out small portions of water and dried food, his tone upbeat despite the situation.

“Drink slowly,” he instructed, passing a water bottle to Nami. “We don’t know when we’ll find more.”
Nami accepted it with a nod but couldn’t resist teasing him. “You’re more useful than I expected, love-cook.”

Sanji beamed, his mood instantly lifting. “Ah, my dear Nami-swan, your compliments keep me alive in this desert!”
Usopp groaned, taking his ration. “I don’t know what’s worse—the heat or listening to this.”

Sanji’s glare was sharp, but Luffy cut in, laughing loudly and grabbing his food. “This is great! Thanks, Sanji!”

 

While the crew rested, Aiko found herself on the outskirts of the group, watching as they interacted so naturally. She clutched her scarf tightly, feeling out of place yet again. Despite her efforts, she couldn’t shake the doubts creeping into her mind.

“You okay?” Chopper asked, his big eyes fixed on her with genuine concern.

Aiko glanced down at him, hesitating before she spoke. “It’s just... everyone is so sure of what they’re doing. I’m trying to keep up, but I don’t know if I’m helping.”

Chopper nodded thoughtfully. “You’re helping by being here. You’re a part of this now.”
The simplicity of his words struck a chord in her, and she smiled softly. “Thanks, Chopper. I’ll keep trying.”

Ace, who had been listening nearby, approached her as Chopper scurried back toward the group. “Your determination reminds me of someone,” he said, leaning casually against the rock. “It’s okay to be scared. Being scared just means you care about what you’re fighting for.”

Aiko blinked at him, surprised by the observation. “Do you really think so?”
Ace nodded. “Yeah. Just take it one step at a time.”

 

As the crew prepared to move on, Vivi suddenly tensed. Her sharp gaze darted toward the horizon, where faint figures shifted in the desert haze. The movement was too coordinated to be random—it was Baroque Works agents, and they were closing in fast.

“They’ve found us,” Vivi said grimly, her voice low but steady.
Zoro’s hand moved instinctively to his swords. “What’s the plan? Fight or evade?”

“Fight!” Luffy declared immediately, his grin wide. “We can’t let them slow us down!”
Before anyone could argue, Ace stepped forward, his voice calm yet commanding. “Let me handle this.”

 

Ace raised his hand, and flames erupted from his fingertips, flickering with raw power. As the agents charged forward, he unleashed a fiery arc that sent a wave of heat cascading across the sand. The agents scrambled to escape the searing attack, their formation broken in an instant.

“You’re making this too easy,” Zoro muttered, but a faint smirk tugged at his lips as he prepared for anyone who got through.
Sanji stepped forward as well, cracking his neck. “I wouldn’t mind warming up a little myself.”

Though Ace’s fiery display left many of the agents incapacitated, a few persisted, determined to block the crew’s progress. The Straw Hats sprang into action, fighting with their usual blend of chaos and precision.

 

Amid the fray, Aiko noticed one of the agents breaking through the line, heading directly for Vivi. Without thinking, she gripped her sword tightly and stepped in front of the princess, her heart pounding in her chest.

“Stop!” Aiko shouted, her voice trembling but firm.

The agent sneered, raising his weapon to strike. Aiko raised her sword defensively, bracing herself for the attack. The clash of blades sent a shock up her arm, but she held her ground, her determination outweighing her fear.

With a swift motion, Zoro appeared at her side, effortlessly disarming the agent. “Not bad,” he said simply, glancing at Aiko before returning to the fight.

Aiko exhaled shakily, her grip on her sword tightening. She turned to Vivi, who gave her a small, grateful nod. “Thank you,” Vivi said softly.
Aiko nodded, her voice steadying. “I’m here to help.”

 

Once the agents were defeated, the crew quickly regrouped. Though the fight had been taxing, their determination remained unshaken.
“We need to move,” Vivi urged, her voice tense. “Crocodile will know we’re coming if he doesn’t already.”

“We’re ready,” Luffy said with a wide grin, his energy unyielding. “Let’s go!”

As the group set off once more, Ace walked beside Aiko, his tone casual but sincere. “You handled yourself well back there.”

Aiko glanced at him, her cheeks reddening slightly. “I don’t know if I did, but... thanks.”

“You stood your ground,” Ace replied. “That’s the hardest part.”

 

Far ahead in Rainbase, Crocodile sat in his office, the glow of his cigar illuminating his sharp grin. His spies had already relayed the outcome of the battle, and he leaned back in his chair with an air of confidence.

“They’re more stubborn than I thought,” he mused, exhaling a plume of smoke. “But the desert hasn’t taken them yet. Let’s make sure it does.”
As the Straw Hats moved closer to Rainbase, the storm of Crocodile’s schemes loomed large, ready to test their limits like never before.

 

The Straw Hat Pirates, split into smaller groups, moved purposefully through the crowded streets of Rainbase, the City of Dreams. The dazzling lights of casinos and the lively hum of gamblers celebrating their luck masked the darkness that lurked in the shadows of Crocodile's stronghold.

Rainbase was unlike anything the crew had encountered thus far, and every corner seemed to promise both opportunity and danger. With their mission clear but the path uncertain, they braced themselves for what lay ahead.

 

Luffy and Ace led the charge toward Rain Dinners, Crocodile's infamous casino and fortress. The bustling entryway was alive with the clinking of coins and the chatter of gamblers, but Luffy’s straightforwardness threatened their cover almost immediately.

“Where’s Crocodile?!” Luffy shouted as they entered the main hall, his voice booming and earning puzzled stares from patrons. He marched straight ahead, completely ignoring the grandeur of the casino.

Ace placed a hand on Luffy’s shoulder, pulling him back before he could cause a scene. “You might want to keep it quiet,” he said, his smirk tinged with amusement. “Crocodile won’t show himself unless he thinks he’s in control.”

Luffy pouted but nodded, glancing around at the rows of poker tables and roulette wheels. “Fine. But I’ll punch him as soon as I see him.”

Behind them, Nami, Aiko, and Chopper discreetly moved through the side corridors, their task to scout an escape route in case things turned south. Aiko’s nerves were apparent in the way she gripped her scarf tightly, but her resolve grew stronger with every step.

 

Elsewhere in the city, Zoro, Sanji, and Usopp worked their way through the crowded marketplace to secure supplies and gather information. Zoro, with his towering presence, managed to clear a path through the throng of people, while Sanji’s charm disarmed suspicious merchants who were wary of the strangers asking too many questions.

“How do people live here with all these Baroque Works agents crawling around?” Usopp muttered, glancing nervously at a group of intimidating men in dark cloaks passing by.

“They live because they have no choice,” Sanji replied, his voice low. “Crocodile’s control is everywhere. He’s made sure the people feel powerless.”

Zoro remained silent, his eyes scanning the crowd for signs of trouble. As much as he hated to admit it, he agreed with Sanji. The tension in Rainbase was palpable—it was only a matter of time before something boiled over.

 

Back at Rain Dinners, Ace’s sharp instincts picked up on the subtle movements of the Baroque Works agents scattered throughout the casino. They blended in with the crowd, but their watchful gazes betrayed them.

“They’re waiting for something,” Ace said quietly to Luffy as they moved toward the back of the casino. “It’s a trap.”
Luffy grinned, his confidence unshaken. “Good. I like traps. It means they’re scared of us.”

As they approached a restricted area guarded by heavily armed men, Ace stepped forward. “Let me handle this one,” he said, his voice calm but firm. With a flick of his wrist, flames erupted from his hand, and the guards scrambled backward, too stunned to react. “We’re just passing through,” Ace added with a smirk, leading Luffy into the corridor beyond.

 

Meanwhile, Nami, Chopper, and Aiko navigated the dimly lit corridors of the casino, searching for an exit or alternate route. Nami’s sharp eyes caught every detail, while Chopper’s heightened senses helped them avoid detection.

“Aiko, keep an eye on the path behind us,” Nami instructed, her tone brisk but encouraging. “We don’t want anyone sneaking up on us.”

Aiko nodded, gripping her sword tightly as she glanced over her shoulder. The weight of the mission pressed down on her, but she pushed forward, determined to prove herself. As they turned a corner, they came face-to-face with a Baroque Works agent who had been patrolling the area.

“Stop right there!” the agent barked, drawing his weapon.

Before Nami could react, Aiko stepped forward, her hands trembling slightly but her resolve firm. She raised her sword defensively, blocking the agent’s strike and countering with a clumsy but effective swing. The agent stumbled backward, giving Nami and Chopper the chance to act.

“Nice job, Aiko!” Chopper cheered, his eyes wide with admiration as he shifted into his Heavy Point to neutralize the threat.
Aiko’s heart raced, but a flicker of pride warmed her chest. “Thanks. I’m just... trying to help.”

“You’re doing more than trying,” Nami said with a rare smile. “Let’s keep moving.”

 

At the heart of Rain Dinners, Luffy and Ace finally reached the central chamber, a lavishly decorated room dominated by a grand desk and a single figure seated behind it. Crocodile, Warlord of the Sea and mastermind of Alabasta’s chaos, greeted them with a sharp grin.

“You’ve made it further than I expected,” Crocodile said, his voice calm and mocking. “But you’ve walked right into my hands.”
“Perfect,” Luffy replied, cracking his knuckles. “Now I can beat you up!”

Crocodile’s laugh echoed through the chamber as the walls shifted and sand began pouring in from hidden openings. The air grew heavy with the stifling dryness of the desert, and Crocodile’s smirk deepened.

“This isn’t a fight,” Crocodile said, rising to his feet. “It’s your burial.”

 

Unbeknownst to Luffy and Ace, the rest of the crew faced their own escalating challenges. As Zoro, Sanji, and Usopp encountered increasing resistance in the marketplace, and Nami’s group narrowly evaded more agents, the city of Rainbase seemed to come alive, tightening its grip on the crew.

Far above the city, the stars shone faintly through the desert haze, hinting at the trials yet to come. The Straw Hats were closer than ever to uncovering the truth, but Crocodile’s web was vast, and the odds against them only continued to grow.

 

The Straw Hats and their allies were now deeply entangled in Crocodile’s web. Rainbase, with its glittering casinos and lively atmosphere, served as the stage for what was shaping up to be one of the most dangerous gambits the crew had ever faced. Crocodile’s trap had begun to tighten around them, and though each group fought to fulfill their part of the plan, the sinister forces of Baroque Works loomed over their every move.

 

Inside Rain Dinners, Luffy and Ace stood firm despite the sudden onslaught of sand pouring into the chamber. The room, once lavish and extravagant, had become a swirling storm of suffocating sand under Crocodile’s control. The Warlord of the Sea remained calm, his sharp grin unshaken by the brothers’ defiance.

“I’ve heard a lot about you, Straw Hat,” Crocodile said, his voice smooth and mocking. “And Fire Fist Ace. I have to admit, your little entrance into my kingdom has been... amusing. But it ends here.”

“Not a chance!” Luffy shouted, his fists clenched as he prepared to attack. “I’m going to take you down and save Alabasta!”

Crocodile chuckled, his expression darkening. “You don’t even know the half of what I’ve planned. This entire kingdom is already mine. You’re just flies caught in my sandstorm.”

As Crocodile raised his hand, the swirling sands intensified, forming sharp tendrils that lashed out toward the brothers. Ace stepped forward, unleashing a burst of flames that collided with the sandstorm, creating an intense wave of heat.

“Luffy, keep him busy!” Ace called out. “I’ll deal with his defenses!”
Luffy nodded, launching himself toward Crocodile with his signature attack. “Gomu Gomu no Pistol!” he shouted, his rubbery fist stretching toward the Warlord.

 

In the dimly lit corridors of Rain Dinners, Nami, Aiko, and Chopper worked frantically to secure an escape route. The maze-like passageways seemed designed to disorient intruders, and the presence of Baroque Works agents only added to the challenge.

“This place is a nightmare,” Nami muttered, her eyes scanning the path ahead. “We need to find a way out before we’re completely surrounded.”

Aiko gripped her sword tightly, her nerves on edge as she followed Nami’s lead. Though fear lingered in her chest, she pushed herself to stay focused. Chopper, in his Brain Point form, sniffed the air, trying to detect any nearby threats.

Suddenly, the sound of heavy footsteps echoed through the corridor. A group of Baroque Works agents appeared, blocking their path. The leader of the group sneered, his weapon raised. “You think you can just walk out of here? Think again.”

Nami stepped forward, her staff ready. “Aiko, stay close to me. Chopper, be ready to shift if they get too close.”

“I’m ready,” Aiko said, her voice trembling slightly but filled with determination. As the agents charged, she moved to block the first strike, her sword clashing against the attacker’s weapon. Though her form was unpolished, her resolve shone through, giving Nami and Chopper the opening they needed to counter.

“You’re doing great!” Chopper called out, shifting into his Heavy Point to take down another enemy. “Keep it up!”

Nami, taking advantage of the chaos, used her staff to disarm the remaining attackers, leaving the path clear. “Let’s move!” she shouted, leading the way forward.

Aiko followed, her heart pounding but her confidence growing. She had managed to hold her ground—and that, for her, was a victory in itself.

 

In the bustling marketplace of Rainbase, Zoro, Sanji, and Usopp were quickly running out of time. Their attempts to secure supplies and gather intelligence had drawn the attention of more Baroque Works agents, forcing them into a defensive position.

“This was supposed to be simple,” Zoro muttered, his swords drawn as he fended off another attacker.
Sanji, delivering a devastating kick to an approaching agent, scowled. “Simple doesn’t exist when we’re involved.”

Usopp, ducking behind a market stall, fired his slingshot at an enemy, his aim surprisingly accurate. “I’m not built for this!” he shouted, though his actions said otherwise.

Despite the chaos, the trio managed to hold their own, their unique fighting styles complementing each other in an oddly effective way. As they pushed back the agents, Zoro caught sight of a shadowy figure retreating toward Rain Dinners.

“They’re regrouping,” Zoro said, his tone serious. “We need to get back to the others before we’re completely surrounded.”

“Then let’s not waste time,” Sanji replied, already moving toward their rendezvous point.

 

Back in the central chamber of Rain Dinners, Luffy and Ace found themselves struggling against Crocodile’s overwhelming control of the battlefield. The sandstorm grew fiercer with each passing moment, and Crocodile’s taunts only added to the tension.

“You’re wasting your time,” Crocodile said, his grin widening. “Alabasta will fall, and you can’t stop it.”

Luffy, undeterred, launched another attack. “We’ll see about that!” he shouted, his determination unshaken.

Ace, meanwhile, focused on neutralizing the sandstorm, his flames clashing with Crocodile’s attacks in a dazzling display of power. “Keep pushing, Luffy!” he called out. “He’s not invincible!”

 

As the battle raged inside Rain Dinners, the rest of the crew began converging near the casino’s entrance. Nami’s group arrived first, their faces tense but resolute.
“Luffy and Ace are in there,” Nami said, glancing at the building’s towering facade. “We need to back them up.”

Moments later, Zoro, Sanji, and Usopp appeared, their expressions just as grim. “This place is crawling with agents,” Zoro said. “We’ll have to fight our way in.”
The crew exchanged determined looks before moving toward the casino, ready to face whatever challenges awaited them inside.

 

With the fate of Alabasta hanging in the balance, the Straw Hats prepared to face their greatest challenge yet—a battle not just for survival, but for the heart of an entire kingdom.